Samsung SPH D700_UG_DG27_PS_081710_F6 Sprint D700 Epic 4G User Guide Manual To The B7f5e428 4b5b 487e B5d1 Bd69948d9e4b

User Manual: Samsung SPH-D700_UG_DG27_PS_081710_F6 to the manual

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 264

DownloadSamsung SPH-D700_UG_DG27_PS_081710_F6 Sprint SPH-D700 Epic 4G User Guide Manual  To The B7f5e428-4b5b-487e-b5d1-bd69948d9e4b
Open PDF In BrowserView PDF
SPH-D700.book Page a Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

User Guide

www.sprint.com

©2010 Sprint. SPRINT and the logo are trademarks of Sprint.
Other marks are the property of their respective owners.
8/17/10

SPH-D700.book Page b Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Consejo: Para encontrar esta guía para usuarios en español,
por favor visita a www.sprint.com y haz clic en
Support > Devices.
To find this user guide in Spanish, please visit
www.sprint.com and click Support > Devices.
Important Privacy Message – Sprint’s policies often do not
apply to third-party applications. Third-party applications may
access your personal information or require Sprint to disclose
your customer information to the third-party application
provider. To find out how a third-party application will collect,
access, use, or disclose your personal information, check the
application provider’s policies, which can usually be found on
their website. If you aren’t comfortable with the third-party
application’s policies, don’t use the application.
Open Source Software – Some software components of this
product incorporate source code covered under GNU General
Public License (GPL), GNU Lesser General Public License
(LGPL), OpenSSL License, BSD License and other open
source licenses. To obtain the source code covered under the
open source licenses, please visit:
http://opensource.samsungmobile.com/index.jsp.
>
This device uses open source software. Press
and tap Settings > About phone > Legal information on the
device for more details

SPH-D700_UG_DG27_PS_081710_F6

SPH-D700.book Page c Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Table of Contents
Tip: Looking for something? If you don’t see it in the headings
listed here, try the Index on page 237.

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Your Device’s Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Section 1: Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1A. Setting Up Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Setting Up Your Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Activating Your Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Up Your Voicemail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sprint Account Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Getting Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2
5
5
6
7

Section 2: Your Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2A. Device Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Your Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing the Display Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Turning Your Device On and Off . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery and Charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Device Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11
15
18
19
23

Navigation and Customization . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying Your Phone Number . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Entering Text Using the Android Keyboard . . . .
Entering Text Using Swype . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Entering Text Using the QWERTY Keyboard . .
Creating a Google Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

26
41
41
45
51
55

2B. Making and Answering Calls . . . . . . . . . 56
Making Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dialing Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Answering Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Missed Call Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calling Emergency Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
In-Call Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
End-of-Call Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Additional Calling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Saving a Phone Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Finding a Phone Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dialing From the Contacts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speed Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plus (+) Code Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

56
57
57
58
59
60
61
62
62
63
64
64
65

SPH-D700.book Page d Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

2C. Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Sound Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Display Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Language Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Location Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Synchronizing Accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Search Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Call Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Airplane Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
TTY Use With Sprint Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Security Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

2D. Call Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Viewing Call Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Call Log Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Making a Call From Call Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Saving a Number From Call Log . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Altering a Number From Call Log . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Erasing the Call Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

2E. Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Creating a New Contacts Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Saving a Phone Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Confirming Contact Synchronization . . . . . . . . . 94
Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Contacts Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Contacts Entry Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Editing a Contacts Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Adding a Number to a Contacts Entry . . . . . . 100
Editing a Contacts Entry’s Number . . . . . . . . . . 100
Sending Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Assigning a Picture to an Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Deleting Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Adding Entries to Your Favorites . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Adding Facebook Content to your Contacts . 102

2F. Calendar & Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
My Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Updating Your Device Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . .
Updating Your Android Operating System . . .
Updating Your Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

106
106
112
113
113
115
115
117
118

SPH-D700.book Page e Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Updating Your PRL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

2G. Voice Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Voice Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Opening Menus With Voice Dialer . . . . . . . . . .
Text-to-Speech . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voice Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

119
121
121
122

2H. microSD Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Your Device’s microSD Card and Adapter . . .
Connecting Your Device to Your Computer . .
microSD Card Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Important Connection Information . . . . . . . . . .

123
125
128
129

2I. Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Taking Pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Recording Videos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

2J. Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Turning Bluetooth On and Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Bluetooth Settings Menu . . . . . . . . .
Pairing Bluetooth Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sending Contacts via Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disconnecting Bluetooth Connection During
an Active Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Section 3: Sprint Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
3A. Sprint Service: The Basics . . . . . . . . . . 150
Visual Voicemail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Text Messaging (SMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multimedia Messaging (MMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Caller ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Waiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Making a 3-Way Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Roaming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

150
156
158
162
162
163
164
164

3B. Web and Data Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Getting Started With Data Services . . . . . . . . .
Navigating the Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wi-Fi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4G Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Android Market . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

168
170
177
179
182
196
197

142
143
144
146

3C. Entertainment: TV and Music . . . . . . . 202

147

DivX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Sprint TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

SPH-D700.book Page f Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Streaming Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
YouTube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AllShare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

205
208
208
209

3D. GPS Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
GPS Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Google Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Sprint Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Getting Driving Directions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Section 4: Safety and Warranty
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
4A. Important Safety Information . . . . . . . . 222
General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintaining Safe Use of and Access to
Your Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Caring for the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radio Frequency (RF) Energy . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Owner’s Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User Guide Proprietary Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . .

222
223
224
225
227
228

4B. Manufacturer’s Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Manufacturer’s Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

SPH-D700.book Page i Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Introduction

Your Device’s Menu

This User Guide introduces you to Sprint® service and
all the features of your new device. It’s divided into four
sections:
⽧

Section 1: Getting Started

The following table outlines your device’s main menu
structure. For more information about using your
device’s menus, see “Navigation and Customization”
on page 26.

⽧

Section 2: Your Device

From the Home screen, press

⽧

Section 3: Sprint Service Features

䡲

Add (

⽧

Section 4: Safety and Warranty Information

䡲

Wallpaper (

䡲

Search (

䡲

Notifications (

䡲

Settings (

Note: Because of updates in phone software, this printed
guide may not be the most current version for your
phone. Visit www.sprint.com and sign on to My Sprint
to access the most recent version of the user guide.

WARNING: Please refer to the Important Safety Information
section on page 222 to learn about information
that will help you safely use your phone. Failure to
read and follow the Important Safety Information
in this phone guide may result in serious bodily
injury, death, or property damage.

to open the menu:

)
)
)
)
)

Tap these onscreen buttons to reveal these additional
options and features.
Device menus with additional options (“sub-options”)
appear with
adjacent to the list entry.

i

SPH-D700.book Page ii Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

> Add

5: Wallpapers
1: Gallery
3: Wallpaper gallery

1: Samsung Widgets
1: AccuWeather Clock
3: Calendar Clock
5: Program Monitor

2: Buddies now
4: Feeds and Updates
6: Y! Finance Clock

2: Android Widgets
1: Analog clock
3: Music
5: Picture frame
7: Search
9: Sprint TV
11: YouTube

2: Facebook
4: NASCAR
6: Power control
8: Sprint Football Live
10: Voicemail

3: Shortcuts
1: Applications
3: Contact
5: Direct message
7: Gmail label
9: Music playlist

> Wallpaper
1: Gallery
2: Live wallpapers
2: Wallpaper gallery

> Search
> Notifications
> Settings > Wireless & networks

2: Bookmark
4: Direct dial
6: Directions & Navigation
8: Latitude
10: Settings

4: Folders
1: New folder
2: All contacts
3: Contacts with phone numbers
4: Facebook Phonebook
5: Received list from Bluetooth
6: Recent documents
7: Starred contacts

ii

2: Live wallpapers

1: Airplane mode (On/Off)
2: 4G (On/Off)
3: 4G settings
1: 4G (On/Off)
3: 4G tethered mode

2: Network notification (On/Off)

4: Wi-Fi (On/Off)
5: Wi-Fi settings
1: Wi-Fi (On/Off)
3: Add Wi-Fi network

2: Network notification (On/Off)

SPH-D700.book Page iii Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

6: Bluetooth (On/Off)

6: Call Guard

7: Bluetooth settings

7: Voicemail settings

1: Bluetooth (On/Off)
2: Device name
3: Visible (On/Off)
4: Scan devices
5: 

8: VPN settings

1: Notifications
3: Speakerphone
5: From name
7: About Voicemail

2: Pictures
4: Change greeting
6: Check for upgrade

> Settings > Sound & display

1: Add VPN

Sound settings

9: Mobile networks
1: Data roaming (On/Off)
2: Data Roaming Guard (On/Off))

10: Dial Up Networking (On/Off)

> Settings > Call settings

1: Silent mode (On/Off)
2: Ringer volume
1: Incoming call volume 2: Notification volume

3: Media volume

1: Reject with message

4: System volume

2: North American dialing

5: Phone ringtone

3: International Dialing

6: Pulse notification light (On/Off)

4: TTY

7: Phone vibrate (On/Off)

1: TTY Off
3: TTY VCO

2: TTY HCO
4: TTY Full

9: Audible touch tones (On/Off)

5: System select
1: Sprint only

8: Notification ringtone

2: Automatic

10: Audible selection (On/Off)

iii

SPH-D700.book Page iv Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

11: Haptic feedback (On/Off)

> Settings > Location & security

12: Vibration intensity

My Location

13: SD card notifications (On/Off)

1: Use wireless networks (On/Off)

Display settings

2: Use GPS satellites (On/Off)

1: Orientation (On/Off)

Screen unlock pattern

2: Animation

1: Set unlock pattern

1: No animation
3: All animations

2: Some animations

2: Require pattern

3: Brightness

3: Use visible pattern

4: Screen timeout

4: Use tactile feedback

1: 15 seconds
3: 1 minute
5: 10 minutes

2: 30 seconds
4: 2 minutes
6: 30 minutes

Passwords
1: Visible passwords (On/Off)

5: Power Saving Mode

Credential storage

6: Keyboard timeout

1: Use secure credentials (On/Off)

1: 3 seconds
3: 15 seconds

2: 6 seconds
4: Same as Screen timeout

2: Install from SD card
3: Set password
4: Clear storage

iv

SPH-D700.book Page v Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

> Settings > Applications
1: Unknown sources (On/Off)
2: Quick launch
3: Manage applications

Personal data
1: Factory data reset

> Settings > SD card &
phone storage

4: Running services

External SD card

5: Development

1: Total space

1: USB debugging (On/Off)
2: Stay awake (On/Off)
3: Allow mock locations (On/Off)

> Settings > Accounts & sync

2: Available space
3: Unmount SD card (On/Off)
4: Format SD card (On/Off)

General sync settings

Internal phone storage

1: Background data (On/Off)

1: Available space

2: Auto-sync (On/Off)

Manage accounts
> Settings > Privacy
Location
1: Use My Location

> Settings > Search
Web search
1: Google search settings
1: Show web suggestions (On/Off)
2: Search history (On/Off)
3: Manage search history

v

SPH-D700.book Page vi Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Quick Search Box

2: Swype (settings)

1: Searchable items
1: Contacts (On/Off)
3: Apps (On/Off)
5: YouTube (On/Off)

2: Browser (On/Off)
4: Music (On/Off)
6: Voicemail (On/Off)

2: Clear search shortcuts

> Settings > Language &
keyboard
1: Select Input Method
1: Swype

2: Android keyboard

2: Select locale
1: English

Text settings
1: Swype (On/Off)

2: Español

1: Language
2: Auto-spacing (On/Off)
3: Auto-capitalization (On/Off)
4: Word Prediction (On/Off)
5: Enable Tip Indicator (On/Off)
6: Audio Feedback (On/Off)
7: Vibrate on keypress (On/Off)
8: Display Trace
9: Word Choice Window
10: Speed vs. Accuracy 11: Auto-select word after
12: Swype Help
13: Tutorial
14: Version

3: Android keyboard (On/Off)
4: Android keyboard (settings)
1: Vibrate on keypress (On/Off)
2: Sound on keypress (On/Off)
3: Auto-capitalization (On/Off)
4: Voice input (On/Off)
5: Quick fixes (On/Off)
6: Show suggestion (On/Off)
7: Auto-complete (On/Off)

5: Device keyboard
1: Auto-replace (On/Off) 2: Auto-cap (On/Off)
3: Auto-punctuate (On/Off)

6: User dictionary

vi

SPH-D700.book Page vii Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

> Settings > Accessibility

2: Language
1: American English

Accessibility
1: Accessibility (On/Off)

Accessibility services

2: Spanish

> Settings > Date & time
1: Automatic (On/Off)
2: Set date

1: KickBack (On/Off)

3: Select time zone

2: TalkBack (On/Off)
3: SoundBack (On/Off)

> Settings > Text-to-speech
1: Listen to an example

4: Set time
5: Use 24-hour format (On/Off)
6: Select date format
1: MM/DD/YYYY
3: YYYY/MM/DD

2: Install voice data
3: Always use my settings (On/Off)
4: Speak incoming CallerID (On/Off)

Default settings

2: DD/MM/YYYY

> Settings > About phone
1: System Updates
1: Update Firmware
3: Update PRL

2: Update Profile
4: Update Android

1: Speech rate
1: Very slow
3: Normal
5: Very fast

2: Slow
4: Fast

vii

SPH-D700.book Page viii Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

In Use Menu

2: Status
1: Battery status
3: MIN
5: MEID
7: Signal strength
9: Roaming
11: 4G MAC address
13: Bluetooth address

2: My phone number
4: PRL Version
6: Network
8: Service state
10: Mobile network state
12: Wi-Fi MAC address
14: Up time

3: Battery use
4: Legal information
1: Open source licenses 2: License settings
3: Google legal
4: Privacy Alert from Sprint

5: System tutorial
6: Model number
7: Firmware version
8: Baseband version
9: Kernel version
10: Build number
11: Hardware version

viii

1: Add call/Merge
3: End call
5: Mute/Unmute

2: Dialpad
4: Speaker (On/Off)
6: Bluetooth

While in an active call, press
following options:
1: Contacts (image)

2: Memo

to display the

SPH-D700.book Page 1 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Section 1

Getting Started

SPH-D700.book Page 2 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

1A. Setting Up Service
⽧

Setting Up Your Device (page 2)

⽧

Activating Your Device (page 5)

⽧

Setting Up Your Voicemail (page 5)

⽧

Sprint Account Passwords (page 6)

⽧

Getting Help (page 7)

Release Latch

Setting Up Your Device
1. Install the battery.
Remove the battery from its packaging.
Grasp the device firmly and locate the cover
release latch.
䡲 Place your fingernail in the opening and firmly
“pop” the cover off the device (similar to a soda
can).
䡲
䡲

2

1A. Setting Up Service

䡲

Insert the battery into the opening in the back of
the device, making sure the connectors align.
Gently press down to secure the battery.

SPH-D700.book Page 3 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Position the battery cover over the battery
compartment and press down until you hear a
click.





2. Press and hold
䡲

to turn the device on.
If your device is activated, it will turn on, search for
Sprint service, and enter standby mode.

3. Make your first call.
䡲

Press
touch

to access the Home screen and
to access the onscreen keypad.

䡲

Use the onscreen keypad to enter a phone
number and touch
.
● If your device is in PowerSave mode, press
or
to reactivate the screen.

1A. Setting Up Service

3

Setting Up Service

䡲

SPH-D700.book Page 4 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

WARNING: If your device has a touchscreen display,
please note that a touchscreen responds best to
a light touch from the pad of your finger or a
non-metallic stylus. Using excessive force or a
metallic object when pressing on the
touchscreen may damage the tempered glass
surface and void the warranty. See “4B.
Manufacturer’s Warranty” on page 229.

Unlock Screen
Note: Your device’s battery should have enough charge for
your device to turn on and find a signal, set up your
voicemail, and make a call. You should fully charge
your battery as soon as possible.

Unlocking Your Device Screen
䊳

4

To unlock your phone from this screen, touch and
drag the lock icon up or slide the QWERTY
keyboard out.

1A. Setting Up Service

Activating Your Device
䢇

Note: If you are having difficulty with activation, contact Sprint
Customer Service by dialing 1-888-211-4727 from any
other phone.

If you purchased your device at a Sprint Store, it is

probably activated and ready to use.
䢇

If you received your device in the mail and it is for a new
Sprint account or a new line of service, it is designed to

activate automatically. To confirm your activation,
make a phone call.
䢇

If you received your device in the mail and you are
activating a new device for an existing number on your
account, you will need to go online to activate your

new device.
䡲 From your computer’s Web browser, go to
www.sprint.com/activate and complete the
onscreen instructions to activate your device.
When you have finished, make a phone call to
confirm your activation. If your device is still not
activated or you do not have access to the Internet,
contact Sprint Customer Service at 1-888-211-4727
for assistance.
Tip: Do not press
Pressing

Setting Up Your Voicemail
Your device automatically transfers all unanswered
calls to your voicemail, even if your device is in use or
turned off. You should set up your Sprint Voicemail and
personal greeting as soon as your device is activated.
Always use a password to protect against unauthorized
access.

1. From the phone standby mode, touch and
hold

.

2. Follow the system prompts to:
Create your password.
Record your name announcement.
䡲 Record your greeting.
䡲
䡲

while the device is being activated.
cancels the activation process.

1A. Setting Up Service

5

Setting Up Service

SPH-D700.book Page 5 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

SPH-D700.book Page 6 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Note: Voicemail Password
Sprint strongly recommends that you create a
password when setting up your voicemail to protect
against unauthorized access. Without a password,
anyone who has access to your device is able to
access your voicemail messages.

For more information about using your Visual
Voicemail, see “Visual Voicemail” on page 150.

Sprint Account Passwords
As a Sprint customer, you enjoy unlimited access to
your personal account information, your voicemail
account, and your data services account. To ensure
that no one else has access to your information, you
will need to create passwords to protect your privacy.

Account Username and Password
If you are the account owner, you will create an account
username and password when you sign on to
www.sprint.com. (Click Need to register for access? to get
started.) If you are not the account owner (if someone
else receives the bill for your Sprint service), you can
get a sub-account password at www.sprint.com.

6

1A. Setting Up Service

Voicemail Password
You’ll create your voicemail password (or passcode)
when you set up your voicemail. See “Setting Up Your
Voicemail” on page 5 for more information on your
voicemail password.

Data Services Password
With your Sprint device, you may elect to set up an
optional data services password to control access and
authorize Premium Service purchases.
For more information, or to change your passwords,
sign on to www.sprint.com or call Sprint Customer
Service at 1-888-211-4727.

Getting Help
Managing Your Account

䢇

PQRS
Tap
to add a new line of
service, upgrade your phone, purchase accessories,
or access other account services.

䢇

Tap
to access a summary of
your Sprint service plan or get answers to other
questions.

Online: www.sprint.com
䢇
䢇

䢇
䢇
䢇
䢇
䢇
䢇

Access your account information.
Check your minutes used (depending on your Sprint
service plan).
View and pay your bill.
Enroll in Sprint online billing and automatic payment.
Purchase accessories.
Shop for the latest Sprint phones.
View available Sprint service plans and options.
Learn more about data services and other products
like Sprint Picture Mail, games, ringers, screen
savers, and more.

From Your Sprint Phone Keypad
䢇

䢇

Tap
and account balance.
Tap

to check minute usage
to make a payment.

From Any Other Phone
䢇
䢇

Sprint Customer Service: 1-888-211-4727.
Business Customer Service: 1-800-927-2199.

Sprint 411
Sprint 411 gives you access to a variety of services and
information, including residential, business, and
government listings; movie listings or showtimes;
driving directions, restaurant reservations, and major
local event information. You can get up to three pieces
of information per call, and the operator can
automatically connect your call at no additional charge.
There is a per-call charge to use Sprint 411, and you
will be billed for airtime.
䊳

Tap

.

1A. Setting Up Service

7

Setting Up Service

SPH-D700.book Page 7 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

SPH-D700.book Page 8 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Sprint Operator Services
Sprint Operator Services provides assistance when you
place collect calls or when you place calls billed to a
local telephone calling card or third party.
䊳

Tap

.

For more information or to see the latest in products
and services, visit us online at www.sprint.com.

8

1A. Setting Up Service

SPH-D700.book Page 9 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Section 2

Your Device

SPH-D700.book Page 10 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Tip: Device Software Upgrades – Updates to your device’s

2A. Device Basics
⽧

Your Device (page 11)

⽧

Viewing the Display Screen (page 15)

⽧

Turning Your Device On and Off (page 18)

⽧

Battery and Charger (page 19)

⽧

Device Function Keys (page 23)

⽧

Navigation and Customization (page 26)

⽧

Displaying Your Phone Number (page 41)

⽧

Entering Text Using the Android Keyboard (page 41)

⽧

Entering Text Using the QWERTY Keyboard (page 51)

⽧

Creating a Google Account (page 55)

10

2A. Device Basics

software may become available from time to time. Sprint
will automatically upload critical updates to your device.
• You can also use the menu to manually check for
>
and tap
and download updates. Press
Settings > About phone > System Updates >
Update Firmware or Update Android to search for
and download available updates.

SPH-D700.book Page 11 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Your Device

Key Functions
1. Proximity Sensor detects how close an object is to
14. LED

2. Status Bar
Icons

13. Self Camera
Lens

3. Display
Screen

12. Light
Sensor

4. HOME Key

11. BACK Key

5. MENU Key

10. SEARCH Key

the surface of the screen. This is typically used to
detect when your face is pressed up against the
screen, such as during a phone call.
䡲 While talking on the phone, the sensor detects
talk activity and locks the keypad to prevent
accidental key presses.

Device Basics

1. Proximity
Sensor

2. Status Bar Icons provide information about your
device’s status and options, such as signal
strength, wireless technology, roaming, ringer
setting, messaging, and battery charge.

3. Touchscreen Display displays all the information
6. Camera
Lens

9. External
Speaker
8. Microphone

needed to operate your device, such as the call
status, the Contacts list, and the date and time.
Also provides one-touch access to all of your
features and applications.

4. HOME Key returns you to the Home screen. Press
and hold to open the recently-used applications
window.
7. Flash

Portrait Mode

2A. Device Basics

11

SPH-D700.book Page 12 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

5. MENU Key allows you to access your device’s main
functions menu: Add, Wallpaper, Search,
Notifications, and Settings. While in a menu, press
to open a list of actions available from the current
screen or onscreen option.
䡲 During an active call, press to open additional call
options such as Contacts or Memo.

6. Camera Lens, as part of the built-in camera, this
5.0 megapixel camera lets you take pictures and
videos.

7. Flash, as part of the built-in camera, provides an
additional light source for pictures during low-light
conditions.

8. Microphone allows other callers to hear you clearly
when you are speaking to them.

9. External Speaker lets you hear the different ringers
and sounds. You can mute the ringer when
receiving incoming calls by pressing the volume
button. The speaker also lets you hear the caller’s
voice in speakerphone mode.

12

2A. Device Basics

10. SEARCH Key displays the Quick Search box that
can be used to search for a key term both on the
device and online. It’s the ultimate search field
(page 24).
䡲 For example, entering the word “Pa”, will display
any matching entries from your device’s Contacts
list, current device applications, online Android/
Google apps, or from any online Web page via
Google™ search.
䡲 Press and hold to launch Voice Search where you
can initiate a Google™ search by verbally entering
a text string. The device recognizes your spoken
words and initiates a Web search.

11. BACK Key returns you to the previous menu, closes
a dialog box, or exits an onscreen menu/option.

12. Light sensor lets you use the ambient light level to
adjust the screen brightness/contrast.
In a bright light condition (outdoors), the sensors
cause the device to increase the brightness and
contrast for better viewing.
䡲 In dim light conditions, the device increases the
screen brightness to compensate.
䡲

SPH-D700.book Page 13 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

13. Self Camera Lens, for use with the Qik application,
take pictures while facing the screen, and allows
you to video conference.

15. Earpiece

14. Front Indicator Light (LED) displays a device
notification, charging status, or alert.

15. Earpiece lets you hear the caller and automated

16. Volume
Button

21. Power
Button

Device Basics

prompts.

16. Volume Button allows you to adjust the ringer
volume in standby mode, the voice volume during
a call, and media playback volume.

17. Camera
Button

17. Camera Button lets you activate the camera and
camcorder and take pictures and videos.

18. Charger/Accessory Jack allows you to connect the
phone charger or a USB cable (included).
CAUTION! Inserting an accessory into the incorrect
jack may damage the device.

20. Headset Jack
18. Charger/Accessory
Jack

19. microSD
Card Slot

19. microSD Card Slot lets you use a microSD card to
expand the memory of your phone. (A 16GB
SDHC card comes preinstalled in your Epic 4G.)

2A. Device Basics

13

SPH-D700.book Page 14 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

20. Headset Jack allows you to plug in an optional
headset for convenient, hands-free conversations.
CAUTION! Inserting an accessory into the incorrect

jack may damage the device.

Landscape
Mode

1. QWERTY
Keyboard

9. Delete Key

21. POWER Button lets you turn the device on or off,
or turn off the touchscreen display.
When the screen is turned off, press once to
return to Screen lock mode.
䡲 While the device is unlocked and not on an active
call, press and hold to display the Phone options
menu (Silent mode, Airplane mode, Power off).
䡲

Landscape Phone Features
1. QWERTY Keyboard provides an alphanumeric
character keyboard layout. Lets you enter numbers,
letters, and characters, as well as navigate within
menus.

2. Fn Key (Function) key

lets you enter the
alternate character or symbol displayed on each
key on the QWERTY keyboard.

8. Function
Keys
2. Fn Key
3. Shift
Key
4. Smiley Key

7. Enter
Key
5. Space Key

3. Shift Key lets you toggle alphabet characters
between mixed case, uppercase, and lowercase.
Character case remains as selected until the Shift
key is pressed again.

4. Smiley Key (

2A. Device Basics

) lets you access Smiley icons

(Emoticons).

5. Space Key lets you add spaces between words
and characters.

14

6. Navigation Keys

SPH-D700.book Page 15 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

device’s menu options while in Landscape mode.

7. Enter Key lets you enter additional lines of text.
8. Function Keys allows you to access your device’s
main functions while in Landscape mode (Menu
and Back on the left, Home and Search on the
right). These buttons function in the same manner
as those below the display screen.

9. Delete Key deletes characters from the display in
text entry mode.

Viewing the Display Screen

Status Bar – Service Icons
Activation Not Completed – Your automatic
device activation process failed, please retry.
Signal Strength – Shows your current signal
strength. (More bars = stronger signal.)
No Service – Your device cannot find a usable
signal.

Device Basics

6. Navigation Keys allow you to navigate around your

Airplane Mode On – Your device will not make or
receive calls, or provide data access. Local
applications are still available.
Roaming – Your device is “roaming” off the
Nationwide Sprint Network.
3G Available – Sprint 3G data service is active.

Your device’s display screen provides information
about your device’s status and options. This list
identifies the symbols you’ll see on your device’s
display screen:

3G Communicating – Sprint 3G data service is
active and communicating. When active, the
icon is animated.
4G Service Available – Sprint 4G is turned on
and coverage is available.
4G Service Communicating – Sprint 4G is turned
on and coverage is available although your
signal is weak.

2A. Device Basics

15

SPH-D700.book Page 16 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Status Bar – Service Icons
4G Service Unavailable – There is no 4G
coverage currently unavailable. You are
disconnected from the 4G network. (See “4G
Services” on page 179.)

Status Bar – Status Icons
Device Power Critical – Shows your current
battery only has five percent power remaining
and will immediately shutdown. Represented as
a blinking icon.
Bluetooth Active – Bluetooth technology is
active and enabled.

Status Bar – Status Icons
Call in Progress – A voice call is in progress.
Audio is routed through either the earpiece or
external speaker.
Bluetooth Call in Progress – A voice call is being
routed through a Bluetooth headset.

GPS Location On – Device location feature is on
and available for location-based services such
as GPS Navigation (see page 211).

Missed Call – You have missed an incoming
call.

GPS Communicating – Device location feature is
on and communicating.

Call Muted – The device microphone has been
muted.
Speaker – Speakerphone feature is enabled.
Battery Strength – Shows your current battery
charge level. (Icon shown is fully charged.)
Battery Low – Shows your current battery
charge level is very low.

16

Bluetooth Connected – Bluetooth technology is
active and communicating with an external
device.

2A. Device Basics

Wi-Fi Connected – Wi-Fi is connected, active,
and communicating with a Wireless Access
Point (WAP).
Wi-Fi Connection Issue – Wi-Fi is active but there
is a communication issue with the target
Wireless Access Point (WAP).

SPH-D700.book Page 17 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Sprint Hotspot Active – The Sprint Hotpost
feature has been activated (page 181).
microSD Unmounted – The External SD card
(internal microSD) has been disconnected
(unmounted) from the device and is now ready
for either removal or formatting.
Preparing for Mounting – The External SD card
is being prepared for mounting to the device.
This is required for communication with the
External SD card.

Status Bar – Status Icons
Silence All – All incoming sounds are turned off.
Vibrate Only – The ringer is set to vibrate only.

Data Synchronization – Application sync is
active and synchronization is in progress for
Gmail, Calendar, and Contacts.
Android OS Update Available – A new Android
operating system update is available for
download.

USB Connection – The device has detected an
active USB connection.

System Updates Available – A new system
update is available for download.

USB Debug Connection – The device has
detected an active USB connection and is in a
USB Debugging mode.

Files Downloading – The device is downloading
selected files.

Sign-in/Sync Error – There has been an issue
with your connection to the Google server, or
you were not properly signed into your account.
In order to use Google application or sync
features, you must set up and sign into an active
Google account.

Device Basics

Status Bar – Status Icons

Download Successful – A recent software
download was successfully downloaded.
Calendar Reminder – Shows you have a
reminder of an upcoming Calendar event.

2A. Device Basics

17

SPH-D700.book Page 18 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Status Bar – Messaging Icons
Text Message – You have new text (SMS) or
multimedia (MMS) messages.
Voicemail Message – You have a new voicemail
messages.
3

Voicemail Message – You have multiple new
voicemail messages.
New Email message – Shows you have received
either a new Internet email message or Outlook
email message via an Exchange server.
New Gmail message – Shows you have received
a new Gmail message.
Alarm – You have an alarm event.

Turning Your Device On and Off
Turning Your Device On
䊳

Press and hold

.

Once your device is on, it may display “Searching for
Service.” When your device finds a signal, it enters
standby mode – the device’s idle state. At this point,
you are ready to begin making and receiving calls.
If your device is unable to find a signal after 15 minutes
of searching, a Power Save feature is automatically
activated. When a signal is found, your device
automatically returns to standby mode.
In Power Save mode, your device searches for a signal
periodically without your intervention. You can also
initiate a search for Sprint service by pressing any key
(when your device is turned on).
Tip: The Power Save feature conserves your battery power
when you are in an area where there is no signal.

Turning Your Device Off
1. Press and hold

for two seconds until you
see the Phone options menu.

2. Tap

Power off and then tap OK to power off

the device.
Your screen remains blank while your device is off
(unless the battery is charging).

18

2A. Device Basics

SPH-D700.book Page 19 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Note: Long backlight settings, searching for service, vibrate
mode, browser use, and other variables may reduce
the battery’s talk and standby times.

WARNING: Use only Sprint-approved or Samsung-approved
batteries and chargers with your device. The
failure to use a Sprint-approved or Samsungapproved battery and charger may increase the
risk that your device will overheat, catch fire, or
explode, resulting in serious bodily injury, death,
or property damage.

Sprint-approved or Samsung-approved batteries and
accessories can be found at Sprint Stores or through
Samsung; or call 1-866-866-7509 to order. They’re also
available at www.sprint.com.

Battery Capacity
Your device is equipped with a Lithium Ion (Li-Ion)
battery. It allows you to recharge your battery before it is
fully drained. The battery provides up to 6.0 hours of
continuous digital talk time.
At 5% of charge capacity, there are only a few minutes
of talk time left, the device sounds an audible alert,
displays a critical charge icon (
), and then turns
off.

Tip: Watch your device’s battery level indicator and charge the
battery before it runs out of power.

Installing the Battery
䊳

Device Basics

Battery and Charger

See “Setting Up Your Device” on page 2.

Removing the Battery
1. Make sure the power is off so that you don’t lose
any stored numbers or messages.

2. Grasp the device firmly, locate the cover release
latch, and then place your fingernail in the opening
and firmly “pop” the cover off the device.

3. Carefully remove the battery from the device.
WARNING: Do not handle a damaged or leaking Li-Ion
battery as you can be burned.

2A. Device Basics

19

SPH-D700.book Page 20 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Charging the Battery
Keeping track of your battery’s charge is important. If
your battery level becomes too low, your device
automatically turns off, and you will lose any
information you were just working on.
Note: Although the battery comes partially charged. It is
recommended you fully charge the battery before
using your device for the first time.

1. Connect the USB cable to the charging head.
Charging Head

Release Latch

USB Cable

Incorrect

Correct
20

2A. Device Basics

SPH-D700.book Page 21 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Note: The front LED turns red to indicate the battery is

3. Insert the USB cable into the device’s Charger/
Accessory jack.

currently charging.
䊳

4. Plug the charging head into a standard AC power
outlet.



Plug the flat end of the charger into the device’s
charger jack and the other end into an electrical
outlet. The device turns on with the screen locked
and indicates both its charge state and percent of
charge.

With the Sprint-approved Li-Ion battery, you can
recharge the battery before it becomes completely run
down.

Extending Your Battery Life


Incorrect

Correct

Charger/Accessory Jack

Active applications, light levels, Bluetooth usage, and
GPS functionality all act to drain your battery. The
following is a list of helpful tips that can help conserve
your battery power:
䢇 Reduce your backlight on time. (See “Changing the
Backlight Time Length” on page 69.)
䢇 Turn Bluetooth off when not in use. (See “Turning
Bluetooth On and Off” on page 142.)

Always use a Sprint-approved or Samsung-approved
desktop charger, travel charger, or vehicle power
adapter to charge your battery.

2A. Device Basics

21

Device Basics

2. Slide open the Charger/Accessory jack cover.

SPH-D700.book Page 22 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

䢇

䢇

䢇

䢇

䢇

䢇

22

Turn Wi-Fi off when not in use. (See “Turning Wi-Fi
On and Off” on page 177.)
Turn 4G off when not in use. (See “Turning 4G On
and Off” on page 180.)
Turn off Sprint Hotspot (Wi-Fi hotspot) services when
not in use. This is one of the largest drains on your
battery as it is not only transmitting a Wi-Fi
connection to your devices but is also doing it while
using a 4G connection. (See “Sprint Mobile Hotspot”
on page 181.)
Deactivate the GPS when not needed. Most
applications using this function will periodically query
the GPS satellites for your current location; each
query drains your battery. (See “Activating Location
Mode” on page 211.)
Do not wait until your battery is completely depleted
before charging your device. Repeating this process
of a complete discharge and recharge can over time
reduce the storage capacity of any battery.
Turn off Automatic application sync. (See
“Synchronizing Accounts” on page 73.)

2A. Device Basics

䢇

䢇

䢇

䢇

䢇

Use the Power Control Widget to deactivate hardware
functions such as Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, GPS,
Synchronization, or LCD brightness setting. (See
“Adding and Removing Widgets” on page 35.)
Check the Battery use screen to review what features
or functions have been consuming your battery
resources. (See “Viewing Battery Use” on page 70.)
Check the Running Services and close any
unnecessary applications. (See “Manage Running
Services” on page 84.)
Use the Task Manager feature to end/shutdown
background applications that are still running. These
minimized applications can, over time, cause your
device to “slow down”. (See “Using the Task
Manager” on page 84.)
Animated wallpapers use processing power,
memory, and more power. Change your Live
Wallpaper to a non-animated Wallpaper gallery or
Gallery image. (See “Changing the Display Screen”
on page 70.)

SPH-D700.book Page 23 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

䡲

The Epic™ 4G comes equipped with four main function
keys that can be used on any screen.

Menu Key
The Menu key (
) activates an available menu
function for the current screen or application. When on
the Home screen, the following menu options are
available:
䡲 Add (
) adds one of the following functions to
a selected screen: Samsung Widgets, Android
Widgets, Shortcuts, Folders, and Wallpapers. (See
“Customizing Your Home Screen” on page 33.)
䡲

Wallpaper (
) lets you to customize the current
screen’s wallpaper image. You can obtain this
image from either your Pictures folder, from any of
the available images within the device’s
Wallpaper gallery, or from the animated Live
Wallpapers. (See “Changing the Display Screen”
on page 70.)

Search (
) displays the Quick Search box that
you can use to search for a key term both on the
phone and online. (See “Using the Search Key”
on page 24.)

For example, entering the word “Pa”, will
display any matching entries from your
device’s Contacts list, current device
applications, online Android/Google apps, or
from any online Web page via Google search.
䡲 Notifications (
) allows you to expand popup
notifications area to provide more detailed
information about the current onscreen
notification icons. (See “Using the Notifications
Panel” on page 40.)
●

䡲

Settings (

) provides quick access to the
device’s settings menu. (See “2C. Settings” on
page 66.)
●

The Settings menu can also be accessed by
pressing
and tapping
>
.

2A. Device Basics

23

Device Basics

Device Function Keys

SPH-D700.book Page 24 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Home Key

Using Your Device to Search

The Home key (
) takes you back to your Home
screen (#4 of the 7 total available screens).

Use the Quick Search box
Search Matches
to manually enter a term
(Device & Web)
or number that is
Quick Search
Voice Search
searched for
Box
automatically on both
your device and on the
Web.

Back Key
The Back key (
) returns you to the previously
active screen. If the onscreen keyboard is currently
open, this key closes the keyboard.

Using the Search Key
The Search key (
) displays the Quick Search box
that can be used to search for a key term both on the
phone and online. In some instances, this key opens a
search box specific only to the current application.
䡲 Press
to launch the Quick Search box.
䡲 Press and hold
to launch the Voice Search
function.

24

2A. Device Basics

Touching Voice Search
(
) initiates the same
search function but
without the need to use
the onscreen or
QWERTY keyboards.
You can also use this
feature to dial a phone
number and it is a
supplement to the
current Automatic
Speech Recognition
(ASR) feature. (See “2G. Voice Services” on page 119.)

SPH-D700.book Page 25 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

1. Press

to launch the Quick Search box.

Note: There might be instances within an application where
pressing
reveals only an application-specific
search. Press
twice to open the Quick Search
box.

2. Use either the QWERTY or onscreen keyboard to
enter your search term. (See either “Entering Text
Using the Android Keyboard” on page 41 or
“Entering Text Using the QWERTY Keyboard” on
page 51.)
䡲 As you type, matching items on your device and
matches from Google’s Web search are added to
the onscreen list of previously chosen search
results.
䡲 Search preferences and settings can be
configured to display suggestions in a different
manner. (See “Search Settings” on page 76.)
Note: To hide the onscreen keyboard and see more of your
search matches, press

.

3. Touch a desired match from the list of suggestions,
phone search results, or previously chosen search
matches. Once touched, the item opens in the
appropriate application.
– or –
If what you’re searching for is not in the current list,
touch the Google Search icon (
) in Quick
Search box or on the keyboard to initiate a new
search on the Web.
To search the phone and Web via Voice Search:

1. Press

and touch
(microphone icon on
the side of the Quick Search box).

Note: Touching

in an application’s search box,
searches the application by voice, not the Web.

2. From the open dialog, say what you want to search
for.

3. Once complete, the Voice Search application
analyzes your spoken words and displays a list of
matching keyword terms.

2A. Device Basics

25

Device Basics

To search the phone and Web by entering text:

SPH-D700.book Page 26 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Note: It is recommended that you use this feature in a quiet
room. Loud ambient or background noises can
confuse the application and result in inaccurate search
results.

To use additional Voice Search functions:
From an open Voice Search dialog, speak the following
words to access additional features:
䡲 Directions to allows you to initiate a navigation
session via Google maps. Use either an Address
name, Business name, business type, or other
navigation information to get the desired
directions.
䡲 Navigate to allows you to receive directions via
Google maps™. Use either an Address name,
Business name, business type, or other
navigation information to get the desired
directions.
䡲 Map of allows you to view a map of an area via
Google maps. Use either an Address name,
Business name, zip code, or other navigation
information.

26

2A. Device Basics

Navigation and Customization
The Epic 4G™ is a touch-sensitive device which allows
you to not only select an onscreen option with a single
tap, but also scroll through long menu lists. Simply
slide up and down through the display with your
fingertip.
Tip: Some menu options are also accessed by pressing and
holding an onscreen item, such as a Contact entry from
the Contacts tab.

Home Screen Overview
The Home screen is the starting point for many
applications and functions, and it allows you to add
items like application icons, shortcuts, folders, or
Google widgets to give you instant access to
information and applications. This is the default page
and accessible from any menu by pressing
.
䢇 Status bar: located at the top of the screen, displays
both Notification and Status icons.

SPH-D700.book Page 27 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

䢇

Notification area: displays icons associated with
end-user notifications such as: email messages,
calls (missed, call in progress), new voicemail,
upcoming event, USB connection, emails, and Text/
MMS messages. (See “Using the Notifications Panel”
on page 40.)
䡲 These notifications appear at the top-left of the
screen (within the Status bar) and display
important user information.
䡲 This information can be accessed by either
swiping down from the Status bar (page 40) or by
accessing the Notifications panel
>
Notifications (
).
Status area: displays icons associated with the status
of the device such as communication, coverage,
Bluetooth, 3G/4G and Wi-Fi communication, battery
levels, GPS, etc.

䢇

Main Home Screen: a customizable screen (#4) that
provides information about notifications and device
status, and allows access to application Widgets.
Status bar

Notification area

Device Basics

䢇

Status area

Google search
Main Home
Screen
Shortcuts

Primary Shortcuts

2A. Device Basics

27

SPH-D700.book Page 28 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

䢇

Extended Home Screens: the device’s screen extends
beyond the current visible screen width to provide
more space for adding icons, widgets, and more.
䡲 There are seven available screens. Each screen
shares use of the four Primary Shortcuts (see
page 29). Each of these screens can be
customized.
䡲 The current screen is indicated at the top by a
larger circle. Up to seven (7) total screens are
available.
䡲 Press
to access the main Home screen
(page 27), which appears as the default “page”
on the device, and then slide your finger
horizontally across the screen to go to the left or
right extended screens.
Note: Both the Status bar and Primary shortcuts are visible
across all screens (Home and Extended).
䡲

Think of it as having a desktop so wide that your
screen can only display a portion at a time.

Tip: While on an extended Home screen, press
return to the main Home screen.

Note: Screen #4 is the Home screen.

28

2A. Device Basics

to

Available Screens (7)

Widget

Primary Shortcuts
䢇

Google search: an onscreen Internet search engine
powered by Google™. Touch
to access the
Voice Search feature where you can verbally enter a
search term and initiate an online search.

SPH-D700.book Page 29 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

䢇

Widgets: are self-contained onscreen applications

(not shortcuts). These can be placed onto any of the
available screens (Home or Extended). (See “Adding
and Removing Widgets” on page 35.)
Shortcuts: are icons that launch available device
applications such as Voicemail, Contacts, Phone,
Email, Alarm Clock, etc. These function the same as
shortcuts on your computer.
䡲 Although some may already be found on the
Extended Home screens, the majority can also be
found within the Applications screens.
䡲 The Application screens can be accessed by
tapping Applications (
) from the Primary
shortcuts area.
䡲 Shortcuts can be pulled out from these screens or
deleted (removed from a screen until needed
again later). (See “Creating Shortcuts” on
page 33.)

䢇

Primary Shortcuts: are four shortcuts present

throughout all of the available screens (all 7) and can
be used to both navigate within the device or launch
any of the following functions:
䡲 Phone (
) launches the phone-related screen
functions (Keypad, Call Log, Favorites, and
Contacts).
䡲

Contacts (
) launches the Contacts-related
screens (Contacts, Groups, and Activities).

䡲

Messaging (

䡲

Applications/Home toggles functionality between
the Home and Application functions.

) launches the Messaging menu
(create new messages or open an existing
message string).

●

Tap Applications (
) to access the
Application screens loaded with every
available local application.

●

While in the Applications screens, tap it again
to easily return to the Home screen.

2A. Device Basics

29

Device Basics

䢇

SPH-D700.book Page 30 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Using the Applications Screens

Applications

All of your device’s applications are located within the
Applications screens.

The following is a listing of the current applications
available via both the Primary shortcuts area and via
the Applications screens.

Note: These screens house all default and downloaded
applications (installed from Android Market or from the
Web).

Application Icons
Alarm Clock – Accesses the Alarm Clock
application (page 113).

1. Press

and tap
to open the screen.

䡲

AllShare – Allows users to share their in-device
media content with other external devices using
DLNA (Digital Living Network Alliance)
technology (page 209). The external devices
must also be DLNA-compliant.

To close the Applications
screen, tap
or press
.

Note: These screens can be
displayed as a list by
pressing
and
tapping List view.

2. Scroll through the screens
and tap an icon to launch
the associated application.
䡲 The screens contains device applications such as
Alarm Clock, AllShare, Browser, Camera, Gmail,
Market, Sprint Hotspot, YouTube, and many more.

30

2A. Device Basics

MP3

Amazon MP3 – Launches the Amazon MP3
music download service (page 206).
Asphalt 5 – Launches a demo version of a builtin racing video game.
Browser – Launches the Sprint Powerdeck
browser running Google search (page 168).
Calculator – Launches the onscreen calculator
application (page 115).

SPH-D700.book Page 31 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

JANUARY

Calendar – Launches the Calendar application
that syncs itself to either your Google or
Outlook® Work calendar (page 106). Events can
only be synced to a managed account
(page 73).
Camera – Launches the built-in camera
(page 131).

Application Icons
Maps – Launches a Web-based dynamic map
that helps you find local businesses, locate
friends, view maps and get driving directions
(page 211).
Market – Browse and search for applications on
Android Market (page 196).
Memo – Creates new text memos (page 113).

Contacts – Displays the Contacts tab listing
current contacts, synced from either your
Google or Outlook account (page 92). Contacts
can only be synced to a managed account
(page 73).

Messaging – Provides access to your text
messaging application (SMS) (page 156).

Email – Provides access to both your Outlook
(Exchange Server-based) work email and
Internet email accounts (such as Google, Yahoo,
etc.) (page 182).

My files – Launches a file browser that allows
you to view only supported image files and text
files (page 112).

Facebook – Launches the Facebook Web page
via the browser (page 170).

NASCAR – Launches the Web-based NASCAR
Sprint Cup Mobile application (page 197).

Gallery – Displays a Gallery of camera images
and video stored in the microSD card
(page 135).

Phone – Accesses the phone keypad (page 56).

Gmail – Provides access to your Gmail account
(page 183).

Device Basics

Application Icons

Music – Launches the built-in Music Player
(page 206).

Qik – Allows you to record and share live video
from your device with your friends, family and
your favorite social networks (page 200).

2A. Device Basics

31

SPH-D700.book Page 32 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Application Icons
Settings – Accesses the device’s built-in
Settings menu (page 66).
Sprint Football Live – Launches the Sprint
Football Live services (page 199).
Sprint Hotspot – Launches the Sprint Mobile
Hotspot which allows you to share your phone’s
3G/4G mobile Internet connection with Wi-Fienabled devices (page 181).
Sprint Navigation – Launches a built-in GPS
functionality, giving you access to a number of
location-based services (page 213).
Sprint TV – Allows you to watch live mobile TV
and listen to streaming radio on your device
(page 205).
Sprint Zone – Accesses links to Sprint Zone
services such as Account Information, What’s
New, recommended Android applications, and
other support and promotional content
(page 200).

talk

32

Talk – Launches a Web-based Google Talk
application that lets you chat with family and
friends over the Internet for free.

2A. Device Basics

Application Icons
ThinkFree Office – Provides access to a
Microsoft® Office-compatible Office® suite. It also
provides a centralized location for the
management of your online and offline files.
Voice Dialer – Launches your device’s built-in
automatic speech recognition (ASR) software,
called Voice Control, to dial a phone number in
your Contacts or to launch phone functions
(page 119).
Voice Search – Launches your device’s built-in
automatic speech recognition (ASR) software
and initiates a Google search based on the
recognized text (page 122).
Voicemail – Launches Visual Voicemail
(page 150).
YouTube – Launches the YouTube webpage via
the browser (page 170).

Note: The Email application includes access to both
Exchange Server-based email (also known as Work
email) and other Internet-based email providers such
as Yahoo! and Gmail.

SPH-D700.book Page 33 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

You can customize your Home screen by doing the
following:
䢇

Creating Shortcuts

䢇

Adding and Removing Widgets

䢇

Repositioning Widgets

䢇

Creating Folders

䢇

Changing the Background (Wallpapers)

Creating Shortcuts
Shortcuts are different than the current Home screen
Widgets that only launch an application. Shortcuts
activate a feature, action, or launch an application.
Note: To move a shortcut from one screen to another, it must
first be deleted from its current screen. Activate the new
screen, and then add the selected shortcut.

To add a shortcut from the Applications tab:

1. Press

to activate the Home screen.

2. Select a location
(screen) for your new
shortcut by scrolling
across your available
screens until you reach
the desired one. (See
“Home Screen
Overview” on page 26.)

Device Basics

Customizing Your Home Screen

3. Tap Applications (

)
to reveal all your current
available applications.
By default, applications
are listed in a Grid view.

4. Scroll across the
screens and locate your
desired application.

5. Touch and hold the onscreen icon. The new
shortcut then appears to hover over the current
screen.

6. While still holding the onscreen icon, position it on
the current screen. Once complete, release the
screen to lock the shortcut into its new position.

2A. Device Basics

33

SPH-D700.book Page 34 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Note: The same shortcut can be added to any of the
available screens (Home or Extended). The application
you add to the screen will still appear within the
Applications tab.

To add a shortcut via the Add to Home screen:

1. Press

to activate the Home screen.

2. Touch and hold on an empty area of the screen.
3. From the Add to Home
screen window tap
Shortcuts.

4. Tap a selection from the
available list:
䡲

Applications

䡲

Bookmark

䡲

Contact

䡲

Direct dial

䡲

Direct message

䡲

Directions & Navigation
Gmail label

䡲

34

2A. Device Basics

䡲

Music playlist

䡲

Settings

5. Follow the onscreen instructions to add the new
shortcut to your current Home screen.
To delete a shortcut:

1. Press

to
activate the Home
screen.

2. Touch and hold the
desired shortcut. This
unlocks it from its
location on the current
screen.

3. Drag the icon over the
Delete tab (
and release it.

)

Delete (Shortcut or Widget)

SPH-D700.book Page 35 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Widgets are self-contained applications that can be
placed on either a Home or Extended screen. Unlike a
shortcut, Widgets appear as an onscreen applications.
There are two sets of Widgets: Samsung Widgets and
Android Widgets.
䢇

Samsung Widgets
䡲

䢇

Choices include: AccuWeather Clock, Buddies
now, Calendar Clock, Feeds and Update, Program
Monitor, and Y! Finance Clock.

Android Widgets
䡲

Choices include: Analog clock, Facebook, Music,
NASCAR, Picture frame, Power Control, Search,
Sprint Football Live, Sprint TV, Voicemail, and
YouTube.

To add a Widget:

1. Press

4. Tap an available Widget to place it on your current
screen.
To remove a Widget:

1. Touch and hold a Widget until you can move it
around on the screen.

2. Drag the widget over the Delete tab (

) and
release it.
䡲 As you place the Widget into the Trash, both items
turn red.
䡲 This action does not delete the Widget, just
removes it from the current screen.

To place a Widget onto a different screen:

1. Follow the steps to remove the Widget from the
current screen (page 35).
Note: A Widget cannot be dragged from a current screen to

to activate the Home screen.

2. Touch and hold on an empty area of the screen.
3. From the Add to Home screen window tap Samsung
Widgets or Android Widgets.

an adjacent screen. It must first be removed from its
current location, and then added back to a new current
screen.

2. Touch and drag across your screen to view
another available screen (there are seven available
screens [1 Home and 6 Extended screens]).

2A. Device Basics

35

Device Basics

Adding and Removing Widgets

SPH-D700.book Page 36 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

3. Follow the steps to add a Widget to the current
screen (page 35).
Note: To move a Widget from one screen to another, it must
first be deleted from its current screen. Activate the new
screen, and then add the Widget.

Creating and Managing Folders
Folders are located on any of the three available
screens and can contain both files (such as data and
images) and Contact information or entries.
To create a folder onscreen:

1. Press

to activate the Home screen.

2. Touch and hold on an empty area of the screen.
3. From the Add to Home screen window tap Folders.
4. Tap an available folder type to place it on your
current screen.
Choices include New folder, All contacts, Contacts
with phone numbers, Facebook Phonebook,
Received list from Bluetooth, Recent documents, or
Starred contacts.

䡲

Note: Starred contacts are those Contact entries tagged as
very important.

36

2A. Device Basics

Accessing Recently-Used Applications
Your device keeps a running list of your six most
recently used applications.

1. Press and hold
to open the recently-used
applications window.

2. Tap an icon to open an
application.

Changing the Screen
Orientation
The Epic 4G™ is capable of
automatically changing the
orientation of some onscreen
content. The device’s built-in
6-axis accelerometer senses
movement and changes its angle/orientation.
This allows the device to change the onscreen content
(images, video, Web pages) to properly display based
on the current angle (some screens may not
automatically change and can require sliding open or
closing the screen).

SPH-D700.book Page 37 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Note: An example of a screen that does not automatically
re-orient is the Home screen. This screens requires you
slide out the QWERTY keyboard.
An example of a screen that automatically re-orients by
moving the device is the Contacts screen. This only
requires you to turn the device on its side.

Device Basics

Portrait View

To manually activate the auto-rotate feature:

1. Press

>

and tap

> Sound &

>

> Sound &

display.

– or –
Press

and tap

display.
Landscape View

2. Scroll down and tap Orientation. A checkmark
indicates the feature is enabled. (See “Changing
the Screen Orientation” on page 69.)
䡲 Clear the Orientation checkmark to disable this
automatic orientation adjustment.

Although most screens will change orientation once
the QWERTY keyboard is opened, this feature can be
manually enabled to change the orientation for all
applicable screens when rotation is detected.

2A. Device Basics

37

SPH-D700.book Page 38 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Menu Navigation
There are two ways to navigate through a menu:
䢇 Using your finger (page 38)
䢇 Using the built-in keyboard’s navigation/arrow keys
(page 38)

Selecting Menu Items Using Your Fingers
As you navigate through the menu, you activate menu
options by tapping the onscreen entry. Select any
option by tapping it.

1. Tap an onscreen icon
to launch a menu or
feature.

2. Scroll your finger
across the screen to
navigate through a
menu list (bottom up or
top down).

38

2A. Device Basics

3. Tap a menu item to make a selection or activate a
field.
To launch the keypad using your fingers:
䊳

Tap

from the Home screen.

Selecting Menu Items Using Your Keyboard
As you navigate through a menu with these navigation
keys, options are highlighted. Select any option by
pressing a directional arrow from the QWERTY
keyboard and moving the onscreen selection,
highlighting it and pressing
.
䡲 If the option is numbered, you can select it by
pressing the corresponding number on the
phone’s keypad.
Access the QWERTY keyboard and locate the
navigation keys, located at the right of the keyboard.

SPH-D700.book Page 39 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

To return to Home screen:
䊳

Enter

Left

Down

Right

Press

.

Using Context Menus
Context menus (also called popup menus) contain
tools that apply to a specific item on the screen. They
function similar to those menu options available on
your computer when you use a right-mouse click.
You open a context menu by touching and holding an
onscreen item.

To view your text messages using the directional keys:

1. Use the navigation keys until

is highlighted
and press
. (If you have any text messages,
they are displayed.)

2. Press Up or Down to highlight an available
message and press

to view its content.

Backing Up Within a Menu
To go to the previous menu:
䊳

Press

.

2A. Device Basics

39

Device Basics

Up

SPH-D700.book Page 40 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Note: Not all items have context menus. If you touch and hold
an item that has no context menu, nothing happens.

Using the Notifications Panel
The Notification area indicates new message events
(data sync status, new messages, calendar events, call
status, etc). You can expand this area to provide more
detailed information about the current onscreen
notification icons.

1. Touch and hold the Status bar, and then slide your
finger down the screen.

2. Tap a notification entry to open the associated
application.
Note: The Notifications panel can also be opened on the
Home screen by pressing
Notifications.

40

2A. Device Basics

and then tapping

SPH-D700.book Page 41 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Launching Additional Panel Functions
In addition to notifications, this panel also provides
quick and ready access to four device functions. These
can be quickly activated or deactivated.

Displaying Your Phone Number
䊳

Press

>
and tap
>
About phone > Status. (Your phone number and

Device Basics

other information about your device and account is
displayed.)

Entering Text Using the Android
Keyboard
When you activate a field where you can enter text,
numbers, symbols, etc., you can either use the
onscreen keyboard or QWERTY keyboard.

The following functions can either be activated (green)
or deactivated (gray): Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, 4G, or GPS.
Note: 4G and Wi-Fi connections can not be simultaneously
active. To activate 4G services, you must turn Wi-Fi off
on your Epic 4G.

There are two versions of the onscreen keyboard
available on your Epic 4G: the Android keyboard, which
emulates a standard QWERTY keyboard, and Swype
(default input method), which uses a unique gliding
method to let you enter whole words quickly. This
section primarily covers the Android keyboard method.

2A. Device Basics

41

SPH-D700.book Page 42 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Onscreen keyboard entry can be done in either Portrait
or Landscape orientations. The Landscape orientation
provides more space and results in slightly bigger
onscreen keys. If you find that you prefer to enter text
via the onscreen keyboard, and need bigger keys, use
this orientation.

Default Input
Method

(To use the onscreen keyboard in landscape mode,
you will need to set your device to automatically
change orientation when rotated. See “Changing the
Screen Orientation” on page 69.)

Choosing Android Keyboard or Swype
1. Press

>
and tap
keyboard > Select Input Method.

> Language &

2. Tap either Swype or Android keyboard.
– or –

1. From a screen where you can enter text, tap the
input field to reveal an onscreen keyboard, and
then touch and hold the text input field to display
the onscreen context menu.

2. Select Input method and then touch Swype or
Android keyboard.

42

2A. Device Basics

Note: Although the default text input method is the Swype
method, if Swype input is not enabled within the
device’s settings menu, it will not be provided as an
available input method option. (See “Entering Text
Using Swype” on page 45.)

Selecting a Text Input Mode With the
Android Keyboard
Note: Some characters and types, such as some symbols
and emoticons, are not accessible from the onscreen
keyboard.

SPH-D700.book Page 43 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

1. From a screen where you can enter text, tap the
input field to reveal the onscreen keyboard.

Recipient

2. With Android keyboard as your text entry method,

Send

select one of the following text mode options:
䡲 ABC to use alphabetic characters from the
onscreen keyboard (See page 44.)
䡲 ?123 to enter numbers by pressing the numbers
on the onscreen keyboard. (See page 45.)

Suggested
words

to change letter

Delete

capitalization.
䡲

Voice Input allows the device to use its built-in

Caps/ALT

voice recognition software to hear your voice and
transcript it directly into text.

Text mode

Android Keyboard Overview
䢇

Entry field: a field where text, numbers, or other

characters can be entered.

Device Basics

Tip: When entering text, tap

Entry field

䢇

Voice Input
Enter
Suggested Word choices: a row of selectable word

choices based on the current set of entered text. Tap
an onscreen choice to insert the selection into your
text entry field at the current cursor position.
Tap the gray left and right arrows on this field to
reveal additional word choices.

2A. Device Basics

43

SPH-D700.book Page 44 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

䢇

Delete: deletes characters from the entry field.

䢇

CAPS/ALT: When in ABC mode, this key changes the

䢇

䢇

44

capitalization of the subsequent entered characters.
When in ?123 mode, this key can show additional
symbol characters.
䡲 Capitalization in Abc mode can be altered by
using the Caps button. See “ABC Mode” on
page 44.
䡲 Symbols used in ?123 mode can be enhanced by
accessing additional symbol characters. See
“Entering Numbers and Symbols” on page 45.
Text mode: There are two available modes: ABC and
?123.
䡲 ABC mode contains only letters. Text mode button
indicates ?123 .
䡲 ?123 mode contains only numbers and symbols.
Text mode button indicates ABC .
Voice Input mode: Tapping this button activates the
built-in microphone and voice recognition software.
䡲 Speak clearly into the microphone. When
complete, your spoken words are recognized,
converted to text, and inserted into your current
cursor position.

2A. Device Basics

Note: It is recommended that to avoid incorrect conversions,
you use this feature in an area relatively free from
background noises.

ABC Mode
In ABC mode, you can enter only letters from the
onscreen keyboard. The text mode key shows ?123 .

1. Select the ABC mode ( ?123 ). (See “Selecting a Text
Input Mode With the Android Keyboard” on
page 42.)
䡲

Capitalization in ABC mode can be altered by
using the Caps button.
next character is lowercase.
only the next character is uppercase.
all subsequent characters are uppercase.

Note: A green circle on the shift key above indicates the
keyboard is set to “Shift-Lock” where all characters are
entered in uppercase.

SPH-D700.book Page 45 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

typing your word.
䡲 If you make a mistake, tap
character. Touch and hold
previously entered words.

DEL
DEL

to erase a single
to erase all

By default, the first letter of an entry is capitalized and
the following letters are lower case. After a character is
entered, the cursor automatically advances to the next
space after two seconds or when you enter a character
on a different key.

Entering Numbers and Symbols
By using the onscreen keyboard in Portrait mode,
some symbols are not available (such as Emoticons or
Smileys). In ?123 mode, you can only enter numbers
and symbols from the onscreen keyboard. The text
mode key shows ABC .

To enter numbers:

1. Tap ?123 to enter the ?123 mode.
2. Tap the appropriate numeric key. (See “Selecting a
Text Input Mode With the Android Keyboard” on
page 42.)
To enter symbols:
Device Basics

2. Tap the corresponding onscreen keys to begin

1. Tap ?123 to enter the ?123 mode.
2. Tap the appropriate symbol key.
– or –
Tap ALT to select from additional symbol
characters. The key shows ALT when the
additional character set is active.

Entering Text Using Swype
Swype™ is a unique text input method that allows a
user to enter a word by sliding a finger from letter to
letter, lifting only between words. It uses error-correcting
algorithms and a language model to guess the word
intended. It also includes a tapping predictive text
system in the same interface.

2A. Device Basics

45

SPH-D700.book Page 46 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

The onscreen keyboard options are different between
the Android keyboard and Swype onscreen input
methods.
Note: Swype is the default input method.

Enabling and Configuring Swype
The onscreen Android keyboard is the default
touchscreen input method on the Epic 4G. This
method of text input is similar to a normal keyboard.
Before you can select Swype as your text input
method, you must enable it in the Settings menu.
To enable Swype:

1. Press

>

and tap

> Language &

keyboard.

2. Scroll down and tap Swype. A green checkmark
indicates the feature is enabled.
To configure Swype settings:

1. Press

>

and tap

> Language &

keyboard.

2. Scroll down and tap Swype (Swype settings).

46

2A. Device Basics

3. Scroll down the screen list of available options and
touch a corresponding entry to either activate or
configure the setting.
䡲 Preferences allows configuration of the Swype text
input and feedback parameters.
● Language allows you to select the current text
input language. Default language is US
English.
● Auto-spacing automatically inserts spaces
between words. When you finish a word, just
lift your finger and start the next word.
● Auto-capitalization automatically capitalizes
the first letter of a sentence’s first word.
● Word Prediction uses a built-in word database
to predict your desired words while entering
text in Swype.
● Enable Tip Indicator turns on an onscreen
flashing indicator that provides helpful usage
information.
● Audio Feedback turns on/off sounds
generated by the Swype application during
use.

SPH-D700.book Page 47 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Vibrate on keypress activates a vibratory

sensation as you enter text via the onscreen
keypad.
䡲 Operation provides access to Swype operation
parameters.
● Display Trace sets the length of time the word
trace line remains onscreen as you swype
across the screen. Move the slider between
Shorter or Longer and touch OK.
● Word Choice Window sets the how often the
word choice selection window appears
onscreen. Move the slider between Never or
Always and touch OK.
● Speed vs. Accuracy sets how quickly Swype
responds to your onscreen input.
Do you prefer more accurate text entry or is
your desire for speed? Move the slider
between Fast Response (speed) or Error
Tolerant (accuracy) and touch OK.
● Auto-select word after sets the time period that
must pass before the first word is
automatically inserted. Move the slider
between 3 secs or 20 secs and touch OK.

䡲

Help provides access to Swype help.

Swype Help to access Swype Help information
and user manual.
● Tutorial provides access to onscreen Swype
Tutorials.
䡲 About displays the software version of the current
Swype application.
●

Text Entry tips:
䢇

䢇

䢇

䢇

To create double letter like pp in "apple," just do a
“squiggle” on the P key.
To enter punctuation, touch and hold a key to view a
punctuation menu and make a selection.
To enter contractions, move your finger over the
apostrophe.
To correct a misspelled word, double-tap on the
word you want to change and then tap
to erase
a single character. Touch and hold
to erase an
entire word.

2A. Device Basics

47

Device Basics

●

SPH-D700.book Page 48 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Selecting a Text Input Mode in Swype
Note: Some characters and types, such as some symbols
and emoticons, are not accessible from the onscreen
keyboard.

Swype Keyboard Overview
䢇

Entry field: a field where text, number, or other

䢇

Delete: deletes characters from the entry field.

characters can be entered.

1. From a screen where you can enter text, tap the
input field to reveal the onscreen keyboard.

Recipient

2. With Swype as your text entry method, select one
of the following text mode options:
123 ABC to use Swype with alphanumeric
characters from the onscreen keyboard.
䡲 SYM (Symbol) to enter symbols from the onscreen
keyboard.

Send

䡲

Tip: When entering text, tap

to change letter

Entry field

capitalization.

Important: Even if Swype is enabled from within the
Language & keyboard menu (page 46), Swype
must also be selected from within the Select Input
Method context menu (page 42).

Delete
Caps/ALT
SWYPE mode
Text Input mode

48

2A. Device Basics

Speech to Text

SPH-D700.book Page 49 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

䢇

䢇

CAPS/ALT: When in 123ABC mode, this key changes
the capitalization of the subsequent entered
characters. When in SYM mode, this key can show
additional symbol characters.
Text Input mode: There are two available modes:
123ABC and SYM.
䡲 123ABC mode contains alphanumeric characters
and a few common punctuation marks. Text
mode button indicates SYM .
䡲 SYM mode contains only symbols and numbers.
123 .
Text mode button indicates ABC
SWYPE tips (
): Tapping this button displays the
Swype tips and tutorial screen.

123ABC Mode
In 123ABC mode, you can enter only letters and a few
common punctuation marks from the onscreen
keyboard. The text mode key shows SYM .

1. Select the 123ABC mode (showing letters and
numbers on the onscreen keys).

䡲

Capitalization in this mode can be altered by
using the Caps button.
next character is lowercase.
only the next character is uppercase.
all subsequent characters are uppercase.

2. Swipe your finger continuously over the letters to
form a word.
If you make a mistake, tap
character. Touch and hold
word.

䡲

to erase a single
to erase an entire

By default, the first letter of an entry is capitalized and
the following letters are lower case. After a word is
entered and you lift your finger, the cursor automatically
adds a space after the word.

Entering Numbers and Symbols
By using the onscreen keyboard in Portrait mode,
some symbols are not available (such as Emoticons or
Smileys). In SYM mode using Swype, you can only
enter symbols and numbers from the onscreen
keyboard. The text mode key shows 123 .
ABC

2A. Device Basics

49

Device Basics

䢇

SPH-D700.book Page 50 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

To enter numbers and symbols in Swype mode:

1. Tap SYM to enter the SYM mode.
2. Touch the key for the number or symbol you
want to enter. To enter the alternate symbol on a
key, tap
.
To enter text via Swype:
This example shows a user entering the word “there”.
Put your finger down on the “t”, and without lifting, glide
it to the “h”, and then to the “e”, and then over to the “r”,
and back to the “e”. When complete, lift your finger off
the screen to allow the device to determine the closest
word match.
Note: If multiple word choices exist for your Swype entry, an
onscreen popup appears to provide additional word
choices.

1. Touch an onscreen
character, and then,
while maintaining your
finger onscreen, drag to
the next character in the
desired word.

2. Repeat this process until
the desired characters
have been drawn over.
䡲 Select from an
onscreen list of possible
word matches (if
prompted).
䡲 This occurs if your
current swype has
generated more than one possible word match.
For tips on using Swype, touch
onscreen information.

50

2A. Device Basics

and follow the

SPH-D700.book Page 51 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Entering Text Using the QWERTY
Keyboard
Accessing the QWERTY Keyboard
Device Basics

The Epic 4G™ has a full, slide-out QWERTY keyboard.
The keyboard is located beneath the display screen
and is accessed by sliding it open. This orients the
device's display to Landscape (widescreen) mode.
With the QWERTY keyboard, you can type letters,
numbers, punctuation, and other special characters
into text entry fields or other applications as easily as
on your computer.
To open the device and access the keyboard:

To reveal additional QWERTY text editing options:

1. Rotate the device 90 degrees counter-clockwise.

1. Touch and hold an active text entry field.

2. Slide the top section of the device up to open, as

2. From the Edit text context menu, tap an available

shown in the illustration. When you slide the device
open, the display rotates from a vertical viewing
mode (Portrait) to a horizontal viewing mode
(Landscape).

function:
Select all highlights all characters in the text
message field.
䡲 Select text/Stop selecting text lets you manually
highlight characters in the text message field.
䡲

2A. Device Basics

51

SPH-D700.book Page 52 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Cut all cuts all characters in the current text
message field.
䡲 Copy copies selected characters in the current
text message field.
䡲 Copy all copies all characters in the current text
message field.
䡲 Paste inserts the previously cut or copied text into
the message field.
䡲 Input method provides additional text input
methods (Swype or Android keyboard). (When the
QWERTY keyboard is open, Swype and Android
Keyboard are disabled.)
䡲

Using the Keyboard
In this section we’ll cover the steps necessary to enter
text using the QWERTY keyboard. Using your device's
QWERTY keyboard is just like using any standard
computer keyboard.
The following keys perform special functions when
entering text:

52

2A. Device Basics

FN: Allows you to use alternate characters
displayed at the top of the QWERTY keys.
Examples: $, @, #, !
Shift: Changes the text input mode
among Upper/Lower/Mixed case mode.
Smiley: Launches the Smileys page.
Scroll down and tap an entry from the
extensive list of emoticons.
Space: Inserts an empty space.
OK/Enter: Moves the insertion point to the
next line in a message.
Delete: Deletes the previous character,
similar to the backspace key on a
computer keyboard.
Menu: Allows you to access your device’s
main functions menu. Works in the same
manner as the device's main buttons.
Back: Returns you to the previous screen.
Works in the same manner as the
device's main buttons.

SPH-D700.book Page 53 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Search: Displays the Quick Search box
that can be used to search for a key term
both on the device or online. Works in the
same manner as the device’s main
buttons.

Entering Letters
The first letter entered (of a field or new sentence) is
always an initial uppercase letter. By default, text is
entered in lowercase characters unless altered by
pressing
.
To enter uppercase and lowercase characters:

䡲

Pressing
cycles through the capitalization
modes (all lowercase, initial uppercase, and all
uppercase).

2. Press the corresponding keys:
For example, to enter the word “Bill” within a text
field, type the keypad sequence below.
䡲 If you make a mistake, press
to erase a
single character. Press and hold
to erase all
previously entered text.
䡲

Bill
䡲

To enter all uppercase characters, quickly press
twice.

1. Press

to make the next character
uppercase. Characters revert back to lowercase
after the next character is typed.
– or –

BILL

twice to make all subsequent
Press
characters uppercase (all new characters are in
uppercase).

2A. Device Basics

53

Device Basics

Home: Returns you to the Home screen.
Works in the same manner as the
device’s main buttons.

SPH-D700.book Page 54 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Entering Numbers
䊳

Press a number key on the top row of the
keyboard.
䡲 If you make a mistake, press
to erase a
single character. Press and hold
to erase all
previously entered text.
䡲 For example, to enter “9:30,” you would use the
keyboard sequence shown below.

Smileys (emoticons) are accessed by pressing
and then selecting an image from the Insert Smiley
page that is then inserted at your current cursor
position.
To enter symbols:

1. Position the cursor where you want the symbol to
appear within your message.

2. Press

and then press the key
corresponding to the symbol you want to insert.
䡲 For example, to enter “I’m #1,” you would use the
keyboard sequence shown below.

9:30

Entering Symbols and Smileys
Most symbols and punctuation marks appear as
alternate characters above the primary letters and
numbers on the QWERTY keyboard. To access these
symbols, press
and then press the appropriate
key.

I’m #1
Tip: Certain additional symbols can be accessed by pressing
and touching the onscreen symbol.

54

2A. Device Basics

SPH-D700.book Page 55 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

1. Position the cursor where you want the emoticon to
appear within your message.

2. Press

to open the onscreen smiley page.

3. Scroll through the list and select a smiley by
touching the onscreen icon.

Creating a Google Account
You will need a Google account to access several
device features such as Gmail, Google Maps, Google
Talk, and the Android Market applications. Before you
are able to access Google applications, you must enter
your account information. These applications sync
between your device and your online Google account.

1. From a computer, launch a Web browser and
navigate to www.google.com.

2. On the main page, click Sign-in > Create an
account now.

3. Follow the onscreen prompts to create your free

4. Look for an email from Google in the email box
you provided, and respond to the email to confirm
and activate your new account.

Signing In to Your Google Account
1. Launch an application that requires a Google
account (such as Android Market or Gmail).

Device Basics

To enter “smileys” (emoticons):

2. Click Next > Sign in.
Note: If you do not already have a Google account, touch
Create and follow the onscreen prompts to create your
new account.

3. Touch the Username and Password fields and
enter your information.

4. Tap Sign in. Your device communicates with the
Google servers to confirm your information.

5. If prompted, create a new Gmail username by
entering a prefix for your @gmail.com email
address.
For additional information about synchronizing
accounts, see “Synchronizing Accounts” on page 73.

account.

2A. Device Basics

55

SPH-D700.book Page 56 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Making Calls

2B. Making and Answering
Calls
⽧

Making Calls (page 56)

⽧

Dialing Options (page 57)

⽧

Answering Calls (page 57)

⽧

Missed Call Notification (page 58)

⽧

Calling Emergency Numbers (page 59)

⽧

In-Call Options (page 60)

⽧

End-of-Call Options (page 61)

⽧

Additional Calling Options (page 62)

⽧

Saving a Phone Number (page 62)

⽧

Finding a Phone Number (page 63)

⽧

Dialing From the Contacts List (page 64)

⽧

Speed Dialing (page 64)

⽧

Plus (+) Code Dialing (page 65)

56

2B. Making and Answering Calls

1. Press

and then tap

.

2. Enter a phone number using the onscreen keypad
and tap

.

If you make a mistake while dialing, touch
to erase the numbers.
䡲 To make a call when you are roaming and Call
Guard is enabled, select OK and tap
. (See
“Call Guard” on page 166.)
䡲

3. Tap

End call

when finished.

Tip: To redial a recent number, press

, tap a number from

the Call Log list, and press Call.
When making calls off the Nationwide Sprint Network,
always dial using 11 digits (1 + area code + phone
number).

You can also place calls from your device by speed
dialing numbers from your Contacts (page 64) and
using your Call log listings (page 90).

SPH-D700.book Page 57 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

When you enter numbers on
the Keypad, you will see three
onscreen options.
From the Keypad screen, you
have the following options:
䢇 Call (
) to call the
entered number.
䢇 Delete (
) to delete
digits from the current
number.
䢇 Send message (
) to
send the current caller a text
message while still maintaining the current call
active.
To initiate additional options, tap
and select an
option.
䢇 Add to Contacts to add the current number to either a
new or existing Contacts entry.

䢇

䢇

䢇

Speed dial setting to access the Speed Dialing menu

where you can assign a speed dial location to a
current Contacts entry. (See “Speed Dialing” on
page 64.)
Add 2 sec pause: to insert a two-second pause to
enter a 2-second delay within a number string (the
phone continues dialing after 2 seconds without any
additional keys being pressed).
Add wait to insert a hard pause within the number
string (the phone waits for your input). A wait requires
that any consecutive numbers be manually sent by
touching Yes.

Answering Calls

Calls

Dialing Options

Note: All incoming call answering options listed below require
you to drag the incoming call notice to the option.
䊳

Drag the incoming call notice up to Answer . Other
options include:
䡲 Ignore ( Ignore ) sends the call directly to your
voicemail box.

2B. Making and Answering Calls

57

SPH-D700.book Page 58 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

䡲

Ignore with text ( Ignore with text ) sends the call to your
voicemail box and immediately allows you to
send the caller a text message.

Pressing the Volume down button mutes the ringer.
Your device notifies you of incoming calls in the
following ways:
䢇 The device rings or vibrates.
䢇 The backlight illuminates.
䢇 The screen displays an incoming call message.
If the incoming call is from a number stored in your
Contacts, the entry’s name is displayed. You may also
see the caller’s phone number, if available.

Answering a Roam Call With Call Guard
Enabled
Call Guard is an option that helps you manage your
roaming charges when making or receiving calls while
outside the Nationwide Sprint Network. (Please see
“Roaming” on page 164 for more information.)
䊳

58

Touch OK to answer the call. (See “Call Guard” on
page 166 for additional information.)

2B. Making and Answering Calls

Note: When your device is off, calls go directly to voicemail.

Ending a Call
䊳

Tap

End call

.

Missed Call Notification
When you do not answer an incoming call, the Status
bar indicates
.
To display a Missed Call entry from the Home screen:

1. Touch and hold the Status bar, and then slide your
finger down the screen.

2. Tap the Missed call entry (

). This opens the

Call log screen.

3. Tap an entry and select Call.
– or –
Touch and hold an entry from the Call log list and
from the context menu, select Call [number]. (See
“Using Context Menus” on page 39.)

SPH-D700.book Page 59 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Calling Emergency Numbers

Note: When you end the 911 call, you are returned to the
Emergency Call Back mode.

Note: When you place an emergency call, your device
automatically enters Emergency mode.

During an emergency call, select an option.
䢇 Speaker On to activate speakerphone mode. (If you
are in speakerphone mode, the option is displayed
as Speaker Off to deactivate.)
䢇 Dialpad/Hide dialpad to show or hide the onscreen
dialpad.
䢇 End call to end the current call.
To exit Emergency mode:

1. Tap

End call

to end a 911 call.

2. Touch and hold Exit on the Emergency Call Back
mode.

Within the Emergency Call Back mode, press the
Home key to use another menu.

Enhanced 911 (E911) Information
This device features an embedded Global Positioning
System (GPS) chip necessary for utilizing E911
emergency location services where available.
When you place an emergency 911 call, the GPS
feature of your device seeks information to calculate
your approximate location.
Calls

You can place calls to 911 (from the Keypad, enter
), even if your device is
locked or your account is restricted.

Note: Depending on several variables, including availability
and access to satellite signals, it may take up to 30
seconds or more to determine and report your
approximate location.

Important: Always report your location to the 911 operator
when placing an emergency call. Some
designated emergency call takers, known as
Public Safety Answering Points (PSAPs) may not
be equipped to receive GPS location information
from your device.

2B. Making and Answering Calls

59

SPH-D700.book Page 60 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

In-Call Options
Once you initiate a call, you
will see six onscreen options.
Tap an option to select it.
䢇 Add call touch and hold to
initiate a 3-way call
(page 163).
䢇

Merge to join two currently
active calls (conference).

䢇

Dialpad/Hide to toggle the

appearance of the onscreen
dialpad.
䢇

End call to end the current

WARNING: Because of higher volume levels, do not place
the device near your ear during speakerphone
use.
䢇

Mute to mute the microphone during an active call.
Tap again to unmute the microphone.
Note: If Mute is activated, the speaker mode is deactivated.

䢇

Bluetooth to route the device’s audio through a
connected Bluetooth headset (On) or through the
speaker (Off). (See “2J. Bluetooth” on page 142.)
䡲

When the call is routed to a Bluetooth headset,
the current call area shows the Bluetooth call
icon (
).

Note: The Headset button is activated to show the current call
is routed to the connected Bluetooth headset.

call.
䢇

Speaker to route the device’s audio through the
speaker (On) or through the earpiece (Off).

䊳

Activate Speaker to route the device’s audio
through the speaker. (You can adjust the speaker
volume using the volume buttons.)

䊳

Deactivate Speaker to use the device’s earpiece.

60

2B. Making and Answering Calls

To route the current call back to the device,
tap Headset to temporarily use the device. Tap
it again to route the call back to the connected
Bluetooth headset.
䡲 When Bluetooth or the Bluetooth headset is
turned off, the call is routed through either the
earpiece or speaker and shows (
).
●

SPH-D700.book Page 61 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

䡲

For example: When you call your bank’s 800
number, use your dialpad to enter your account
number and PIN.

Pressing
during a call displays a list of available
in-call features. Tap an option to select it.

End-of-Call Options
After you receive a call from or make a call to a phone
number that is not in your Contacts, the device displays
the following options:
䢇 Add to Contacts to add the current new number to
your Contacts. (See “Creating a New Contacts Entry”
on page 92.)
䢇 Update existing to add the current number to an
existing Contacts entry. (See “Adding a Number to a
Contacts Entry” on page 100.)
䢇 Call to redial the selected number and call back the
recipient.
䢇 Message to send the selected number a text (SMS)
message.
Note: The End-of-Call options are not displayed for calls

䢇

Contacts to toggle the appearance of the onscreen

䢇

dialpad.
Memo to create a new memo while remaining on the
call.

identified as No ID, Restricted, or Unknown.

2B. Making and Answering Calls

61

Calls

Touch Dialpad (l Dialpad ) to use the onscreen dialpad to
enter additional numbers, for example, an extension or
access code.

SPH-D700.book Page 62 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Additional Calling Options

Note: The End-of-Call options are not displayed for calls
identified as No ID, Restricted, or Unknown.

To obtain additional options such as phone number
and the duration of the call, you must access the Call
log screen. (See “2D. Call Log” on page 87.)

1. Press

and then tap

>

Call log

.

2. Tap an entry from the list and then tap:
Call to dial the selected number and call the
recipient.
䡲 Send message to send the selected number a text
message.
䡲 Create contact to add the new number to your
Contacts. (See “Saving a Phone Number” on
page 62.)
䡲 Send email to the entry an email using a
previously entered address.
䡲 Update existing to add the current number to an
existing Contacts entry.
䡲

– or –
Tap an entry from the Call log list, and then press
and tap View contact, Delete, or Edit number
before call.

62

2B. Making and Answering Calls

Saving a Phone Number
The number of Contacts entries you can store in your
device is limited only by available memory space. Your
device automatically sorts the Contacts entries
alphabetically. (For more information, see “2E.
Contacts” on page 92.)
To save a new number from the Home screen:

1. Tap
2. Press

>

Keypad

and enter a number.

and tap Add to Contacts.

– or –
Tap Add to Contacts (located just above the
dialpad).

SPH-D700.book Page 63 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

4. Tap a destination for your
new contact to be
synchronized. With each
new email account you
create, the list of options
grows.
䡲 The new contact can be
easily synchronized to
either:
● Phone (locally stored
and are deleted when
phone resets).
● Google (Gmail account).
● Corporate (Outlook-Exchange Server).

6. Touch Save to store and update the new entry.

Finding a Phone Number
You can search Contacts for entries by name.

1. Press

and tap

.

– or –
From the Keypad screen, tap

Contacts

.

2. Turn the device on its side and slide open the
QWERTY keyboard.

3. Enter the first letter or letters of an entry. (The more
letters you enter, the more specific the search.)

4. To display contact details, tap an entry from the list
green number field.

Note: You will not see the above option to select a destination
unless you have previously established a Google or
Corporate account on the device. (See “Synchronizing
Accounts” on page 73.)

5. Touch the First name and Last name fields and use
the onscreen or QWERTY keyboard to enter the
new contact name.

2B. Making and Answering Calls

63

Calls

3. Tap Create contact.

SPH-D700.book Page 64 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Dialing From the Contacts List

To speed dial a contact from Favorites:

1. Press
1. Press

and tap

.

Shortcut: From the Keypad screen, tap Contacts (
entries.

and tap

> Favorites ( Favorites ).

2. Scroll through the list and tap the contact.
Contacts

) to list

2. Scroll through the list and tap the entry you want to
call.

3. Tap a phone number.

Speed Dialing
Dialing From Favorites

3. Tap Call to place a call or tap Message to send a
text to the contact.
Dialing a number from the Favorites tab is similar to
dialing one from the Contacts tab. (See “Dialing From
the Contacts List” on page 64.)

Assigning a Speed Dial Location
Only a Contacts entry can be assigned to an available
Speed Dial location.
Note: Eight speed dial locations are available.

You can quickly dial contacts you call frequently by
adding them to your Favorites list. Although not
assigned to a speed dial number, this is a quick and
easy way to dial your favorite Contacts. (See “Adding
Entries to Your Favorites” on page 102.)

64

2B. Making and Answering Calls

Location 1 is reserved for your voicemail.

SPH-D700.book Page 65 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

To assign a Contacts entry to a Speed Dial location:
and tap

.

3. Tap Call. The phone number is then dialed.

– or –
Press

and tap

Plus (+) Code Dialing

and touch

When placing international calls, Plus Code Dialing
automatically enters the international access code for
your location (for example, 011 for international calls
made from the U.S.). (See “Activating Plus Code
Dialing” on page 77.)

> Contacts.

2. Press
Speed dial.

3. Touch an empty speed dial
location (2-9).

4. Scroll through your
Contacts list and touch an
entry’s phone number.
Once complete, the entry’s
contact image and selected number are added to
the selected Speed Dial location.
and tap

1. Press

and tap

.

2. Touch and hold

until you see a “+” on the
display screen. This is equivalent to manually
entering a “011” for international dialing.

3. Dial the country code and phone number, and

To call a speed dial number:

1. Press

and touch Speed dial > [number]
(associated with the speed dial location).

Calls

1. Press

2. Press

.

2. Press and hold a keypad number. The phone
number is then dialed.

then tap
. (The device automatically
prepends the access code for international dialing,
followed by the country code and phone number.)

– or –

1. Press

and tap

.

2B. Making and Answering Calls

65

SPH-D700.book Page 66 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

2C. Settings

The Settings menu can be accessed by one of two
ways on the Epic 4G:
䊳

Press

>

and tap

.

>

.

– or –
⽧

Sound Settings (page 66)

⽧

Display Settings (page 69)

⽧

Language Settings (page 72)

⽧

Location Settings (page 72)

⽧

Synchronizing Accounts (page 73)

⽧

Search Settings (page 76)

⽧

Call Settings (page 77)

⽧

Airplane Mode (page 78)

⽧

TTY Use With Sprint Service (page 78)

⽧

Security Settings (page 80)

Press

and tap

Sound Settings
Ringer Types
Ringer types help you identify incoming calls and
messages. You can assign ringer types to individual
Contacts entries, types of calls, and types of messages.

Selecting Ringer Types for Voice Calls
Your device provides a variety of ringer options that
allow you to customize your ring and volume settings.

1. Press

>
and tap
display > Phone ringtone.

> Sound &

2. Tap a ringtone from the available list. The ringtone
briefly plays when selected.

3. Tap OK to assign a ringer.
66

2C. Settings

SPH-D700.book Page 67 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Selecting Ringer Types for Notifications
The notification area displays icons associated with
user notifications such as email messages, missed
calls, voicemail, upcoming events, USB connections, or
Text/MMS messages. You can select the ringtone that
plays when your device receives new notifications.
>
and tap
display > Notification ringtone.

> Sound &

2. Tap a notification ringtone from the available list.
The ringtone briefly plays when selected.

3. Tap OK to assign a ringer.

You can select whether your device plays a sound
when using the dialpad, when making an onscreen
selection, and when an SD card notification occurs.
>

and tap

䡲

Audible selection plays a sound when making any

dialpad.
onscreen selection.
Haptic feedback causes the device to vibrate
when pressing onscreen keys or with certain UI
interactions.
䡲 SD card notifications plays a sound when an SD
card notification event occurs.
䡲

Adjusting the Volume Settings
Adjust the volume settings to suit your needs and your
environment.

Activating Feature Sounds

1. Press

Audible touch tones plays a tone while using the

> Sound &

display.

2. Tap a feature to enable it. (If a green checkmark
appears to the right of the feature, it is already
enabled.)

1. Press

>

and tap

> Sound &

display.

2. Tap Ringer volume, Media volume or System volume.
3. Touch and drag the onscreen slider to adjust the
volume level, and tap OK.
Within Ringer Volume, adjust the Incoming call
volume and Notification volume fields to assign the
volume settings.

䡲

2C. Settings

67

Settings

1. Press

䡲

SPH-D700.book Page 68 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

䡲

Tip: You can adjust the ringer volume in standby mode (or
the earpiece volume during a call) by using the volume
button on the left side of your device.

To set your device to always vibrate for incoming calls:
>

and tap

> Sound &

display.

2. Tap Phone vibrate. (If you have already checked the
option, tapping it again deselects the option.)
To set your device to vibrate while using the dialpad: and
making onscreen selections

1. Press

and tap

> Sound &

2. Tap Vibration intensity.
3. Touch and drag the onscreen slider to adjust the

Press the volume button down in standby mode
until you see
on the screen.

1. Press

>

display.

To set your device to vibrate for incoming calls and silent
for notifications:

>

and tap

> Sound &

display.

2. Tap Haptic feedback. (If you have already checked
the option, tapping it again deselects the option.)

68

To set the vibration intensity on your device:

1. Press

Vibrate

䊳

This provides a physical feedback when
interacting with the onscreen options.

2C. Settings

intensity level, and tap OK.

Silence All
The Silence All option allows you to mute all sounds
without turning your device off (except for Media
volume).
To activate Silence All:
䊳

Press and hold the volume button down in standby
mode until you see
on the screen.

To deactivate Silence All:
䊳

Press the volume button up repeatedly to select a
volume level.

SPH-D700.book Page 69 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Window Animation

To set your device to silent mode:

1. Press

>

and tap

> Sound &

display.

2. Tap Silent mode. This option silences all audio on
the device except for media and alarms. (If you
have already checked the option, tapping it again
deselects this option.)

This feature provides the use of animation when
onscreen windows are opened and closed. If
deactivated, windows pop on and off and no transitions
are applied.

1. Press

>

and tap

> Sound &

display.

2. Tap Animation and select No animation, Some

Display Settings

animations, or All animations.

Changing the Screen Orientation

Changing the Backlight Time Length

Although most screens will change orientation once
the QWERTY keyboard is opened, this feature can be
manually enabled to change the orientation for all
screens when rotation is detected. (See “Changing the
Screen Orientation” on page 36.)

Select how long the display screen remains lit after you
press any key.

>

and tap

> Sound &

display.

>
and tap
display > Screen timeout.

> Sound &

2. Tap a time setting (15 seconds - 30 minutes).
Settings

1. Press

1. Press

Note: Long screen backlight settings reduce the battery’s talk
and standby times.

2. Tap Orientation (enabled by default). A green
checkmark indicates the feature is enabled.
Clear the Orientation checkmark to disable this
automatic orientation adjustment.

䡲

2C. Settings

69

SPH-D700.book Page 70 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Changing the Keyboard Backlight Time
Length
Select how long the keyboard stays lit after you press
any key.

1. Press

>
and tap
display > Keyboard timeout.

> Sound &

2. Tap a time setting.
talk and standby times.

– or –
Clear the checkmark and then touch and drag
Brightness slider left or right to adjust the screen
contrast and tap OK.

>
and tap
About phone > Battery use.

Adjust your screen’s brightness to suit your
surroundings.
and tap

display.

2. Scroll down and tap Brightness.

Review which applications are draining your battery.

1. Press

Changing the Brightness

>

to allow the device to adjust brightness
automatically.

Viewing Battery Use

Note: Long keyboard backlight settings reduce the battery’s

1. Press

3. Select the checkmark next to Automatic brightness

> Sound &

>

2. Tap an item to see more detailed information.

Changing the Display Screen
Choose what you see on the Home screen (behind
your shortcuts and Widgets) while powering on or off
the device, and when in standby mode.
Note: Using animated Live Wallpapers can deplete your
battery faster than image wallpapers.

70

2C. Settings

SPH-D700.book Page 71 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

>

and tap

(Wallpaper).

2. Tap Gallery, Live wallpapers, or Wallpaper gallery.
䡲

Gallery lets you choose from pictures taken using

the built-in camera or copied to your device as a
wallpaper. You can crop the picture before setting
it as a wallpaper. See “Assigning a Picture to an
Entry” on page 101 to learn how to crop the
picture.
䡲 Live wallpapers provides a selection of preloaded
animated video wallpapers.
䡲 Wallpaper gallery provides a selection of
preloaded wallpaper images.

3. Scroll through available images and tap a
selection to preview it.

4. Tap Set wallpaper to assign the new wallpaper.
– or –
Tap Save to assign a picture as a wallpaper.

Adjusting the Date and Time

1. Press

>

and tap

> Date & time.

2. Tap Automatic to disable the feature.
Note: If enabled, you can not alter the date, time zone or time
values.

3. Tap Set date. Adjust the date, month, and year by
tapping

or

. Tap Set when finished.

4. Tap Select time zone, and then select a time zone
from the onscreen list. Scroll down the list to view
additional time zones.

5. Tap Set time. Adjust the hour and minute by
tapping
or
. Tap the am or pm icon to
change the value. Tap Set when finished.

6. Tap Use 24-hour format to toggle between using a
12-hour or a 24-hour format.

7. Tap Select date format to select how the date
information is displayed on your device. The
selected date format is also applied to the date
displayed within the device’s Alarm Clock.

Settings

1. Press

Your device obtains its time and date information by
using the network-provided date, time, and time zone.
These values can be manually altered.

2C. Settings

71

SPH-D700.book Page 72 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Language Settings

Note: Turning Location on will allow the network to detect
your position using GPS technology, making some
Sprint applications and services easier to use. Turning
Location off will disable the GPS location function for all
purposes except 911, but will not hide your general
location based on the cell site serving your call. No
application or service may use your location without
your request or permission. GPS-enhanced 911 is not
available in all areas.

To assign the default language used by the Android
operating system.

1. Press

>
and tap
keyboard > Select locale.

> Language &

2. Tap either English or Español. All menus are then
updated to the new language.

To enable your device’s GPS Location feature:

Location Settings

1. Press

Your device is equipped with a Location feature for use
in connection with location-based services.

2. Tap Use GPS satellites. A green checkmark

The Location feature allows the network to detect your
position. Turning Location off will hide your location
from everyone except 911.

>
Location & security.

and tap

>

indicates the GPS location feature is enabled.
To enable Location via wireless networks:

1. Press

>
Location & security.

and tap

>

2. Tap Use wireless networks. A green checkmark
indicates the feature is enabled.
This service uses available wireless networks to
pinpoint your location within certain applications
such as Google Maps (page 211).

䡲

72

2C. Settings

SPH-D700.book Page 73 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

3. Tap Agree. Enabling this feature allows Google to
collect anonymous location data whether or not
any location application or other related feature is
active or in use.
䡲 Tap Use wireless networks > disagree to disable
the collection of data. Enabling this feature can
utilize more resources and slow performance.

Synchronizing Accounts

To enable the auto-sync feature:
and tap

>

synchronized via the Accounts & sync menu.
This process is not automatic for some accounts.
If a new email account does not appear in this
menu, it must be manually added and
synchronized.

Synchronizing Your Google Account
By default, there are no accounts managed by the
device. These must be manually added.
Settings

Corporate and Google accounts provide the ability to
synchronize Calendar events and Contacts.
>
Accounts & sync.

feature is enabled.
This feature enables the synchronization of data
between your device and external sites or servers.
䡲 The two main components are Contacts and
Calendar Events. Before these can be
synchronized, they must be added to the
managed accounts list.
䡲

Important: Any new email account should be managed and

Your device provides the ability to synchronize data
from a variety of different sources or sites. These
accounts can range from Google, a Corporate
Exchange Email Server, and other social sites such as
Facebook, Twitter, and MySpace.

1. Press

2. Tap Auto-sync. A green checkmark indicates the

To add manage an existing Google account:

1. Press

>
Accounts & sync.

and tap

>

2. Tap Add account > Google.

2C. Settings

73

SPH-D700.book Page 74 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

3. Click Next > Sign in.

Synchronizing Your Corporate Account

Note: If you do not already have a Google account, touch

By default, there are no Corporate Calendar events
managed by the device. These must be manually
added. (See “Synchronizing Corporate Calendar
Events” on page 106.)

Create and follow the onscreen prompts to create your
new account.

4. Touch the Username (@gmail.com) and Password
fields and enter your information.

Note: Once a corporate email account is created, it is

5. Tap Sign in. Your device then communicates with
the Google servers to confirm your information.
Your existing Gmail account then appears within
the Managed accounts area of the screen.
䡲 Any changes or updates to your Gmail account
are then automatically updated to your device.
To configure the Google management settings:

1. Press

>
Accounts & sync.

and tap

>

2. Tap

within the Google account field to reveal
the account’s synchronization settings screen.

3. Tap the parameters you wish to synchronize (Sync
Contacts, Sync Gmail, Sync Calendar). A green
checkmark indicates the feature is enabled.

4. Press
74

to return to the previous screen.

2C. Settings

automatically added as a managed account.

To add a new Corporate account:

1. Press

>
Accounts & sync.

and tap

>

2. Tap Add account > Corporate.
3. Follow the onscreen prompts to create your new
Corporate email account. (See “Corporate Email
(Outlook)” on page 190.)
䡲 Any changes or updates to your Corporate/
Outlook account are then automatically updated
to your device.

To configure the Corporate management settings:

1. Press

>
Accounts & sync.

and tap

●

>

2. Tap

within the Corporate account field to
reveal the account’s synchronization settings
screen.

3. Tap the parameters you wish to synchronize.
䡲

●

Account settings allows you to configure:
●

●

●

Account name displays the name used by the

device to track the account.
Your name displays the name used in the
From field within your outgoing emails.
Email check frequency configures the
frequency which the device queries the
remote server for new email changes. Choose
from: Automatic (Push), Never, Every 5 minutes,
Every 10 minutes, Every 15 minutes, Every 30
minutes, or Every hour.

●

●

●

●

●

Amount to synchronize to assign the sync
range for your incoming and outgoing emails
between your device and your external
exchange server. Choose how many days
worth of emails should the device and server
synchronize. Choose from: One day, Three
days, One week, Two weeks, or One month.
Default account assigns this account as the
default used when sending out new emails.
Email notifications enables the device to
display a status bar icon
when new
emails have been received.
Select ringtone assigns an audible ringtone
when a new or upcoming event is pending.
Vibrate assigns a vibration when a new or
upcoming event is pending.
Incoming settings provides access to the
Domain, password, and exchange server
parameter fields.
Sync contacts synchronizes the contacts
between your device and the remote
exchange server. A green checkmark
indicates the feature is enabled.

2C. Settings

75

Settings

SPH-D700.book Page 75 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

SPH-D700.book Page 76 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Sync calendar synchronizes your Exchange
calendar entries between your device and the
remote exchange server. A green checkmark
indicates the feature is enabled.
● Forward with files causes any outgoing email
reply to include any currently attached files. A
green checkmark indicates the feature is
enabled.
● Signature allows you to create an outgoing
email signature attached to new emails sent
from your device.
䡲 Sync Contacts synchronizes the contacts between
your device and the remote exchange server. A
green checkmark indicates the feature is enabled.
●

4. Press

to return to the previous screen.

For more detailed Work/Corporate email information,
see “Corporate Email (Outlook)” on page 190. For
more information on Corporate Calendar
synchronizing, see “Synchronizing Corporate Calendar
Events” on page 106.

76

2C. Settings

Search Settings
You can use your device’s search preferences to
configure some aspects of Google Web search (for
example, whether it makes suggestions below the
Quick Search Box as you type), and what phone
features you want to include in searches.

Configuring the Search Settings
1. Press

>

and tap

> Search.

2. Tap any of the following search parameters to then
alter the settings:
䡲

Google search settings opens a screen where you

can set your Google search preferences.
● Show web suggestions also includes search
matches from Google’s online search engine.
● Search history determines whether you also
wish to included personalized search history
results in the list of matches.
● Manage search history helps to manage the
personalized search history associated with
your current registered Google account.

SPH-D700.book Page 77 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Searchable items opens a screen where you can
choose the search categories included in device
searches.
● Categories include: Contacts, Browser, Apps,
Music, YouTube or Voicemail.
䡲 Clear search shortcuts erases the history of
recently selected search results.
䡲

Changing the International Dialing Code
By default, the international dialing prefix (code) is set
to 011. This code can not be changed until the feature
is temporarily disabled. Once disabled, the field
becomes accessible and can be altered.

1. Press

>

and tap

> Call settings.

2. Tap North American dialing to deactivate the

Call Settings

feature. This enables the International Dialing field.

3. Tap International Dialing.
Your device allows you to configure call settings such
as Plus Code dialing, other international dialing
options, and TTY configuration.

4. Tap the entry field and press

DEL

from the
onscreen keyboard to delete the previous value.
– or –

Plus Code dialing allows you to have the phone
automatically dial the international access code for
your location once you touch and hold
.
(See “Plus (+) Code Dialing” on page 65.)

1. Press

>

and tap

Press and hold
on the QWERTY keyboard to
delete the current prefix.

5. Enter a new value and tap OK.
6. Tap North American dialing to reactivate the feature.
This disables the International Dialing field.

> Call settings.

2. Tap North American dialing to activate the feature
(a green checkmark appears in the adjacent field).

2C. Settings

77

Settings

Activating Plus Code Dialing

SPH-D700.book Page 78 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Airplane Mode

To deactivate Airplane Mode:

1. Press and hold
Airplane Mode (Flight mode) allows you to use many of
your device’s features, such as Games, Memo, and
Music, when you are in an airplane or in any other area
where making or receiving calls or data is prohibited.
When you set your device to Airplane Mode, it cannot
send or receive any calls or access online information.

1. Press and hold

to reveal the Phone

options.

2. Tap

Flight mode (Flight mode is OFF).

to reveal the Phone

options.

2. Tap

Flight mode (Flight mode is ON).

– or –

3. Press

>

and tap

> Wireless &

networks.

4. Tap Airplane mode to remove the checkmark.

TTY Use With Sprint Service

– or –

1. Press

>

and tap

> Wireless &

networks.

2. Tap Airplane mode to place a checkmark in the
adjacent field.
While in Airplane Mode, your device’s Status area will
display (
).

78

2C. Settings

A TTY (also known as a TDD or Text Telephone) is a
telecommunications device that allows people who are
deaf, hard of hearing, or who have speech or language
disabilities, to communicate by telephone.
Your device is compatible with select TTY devices.
Please check with the manufacturer of your TTY device
to ensure that it is compatible with digital cell phones.
Your device and TTY device will connect via a special
cable that plugs into your phone’s headset jack.

SPH-D700.book Page 79 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

To turn TTY Mode on or off:

1. Press

>
and tap
> Call settings >
TTY. (You will see an informational message.)

2. Read the onscreen disclaimer and tap Yes.
3. Touch TTY Off to turn TTY mode off.
– or –
Touch any of the following to enable the feature:
䡲 TTY HCO, TTY VCO, or TTY Full.
To access the state Telecommunications Relay Service
(TRS) for assistance with TTY calls:
䊳

Dial PQRS
operator.

to reach an

For additional information about Sprint Relay Services
and TTY compatibility, call Sprint Relay Customer
Service at 800-676-3777 or visit www.sprintrelay.com.

For additional technical support you may call
1-888-987-4357, or access the following website:
www.samsung.com/us/consumer/learningresources/
mobile/accessibility/pop_accessibility.html.
Note: In TTY Mode, your device will display the TTY access
icon.
If TTY mode is enabled, the audio quality of non-TTY
devices connected to the headset jack may be
impaired.

WARNING: 911 Emergency Calling
Sprint recommends that TTY users make
emergency calls by other means, including
Telecommunications Relay Services (TRS),
analog cellular, and landline communications.
Wireless TTY calls to 911 may be corrupted
when received by public safety answering points
(PSAPs), rendering some communications
unintelligible. The problem encountered appears
related to software used by PSAPs. This matter
has been brought to the attention of the FCC,
and the wireless industry and the PSAP
community are currently working to resolve this.

2C. Settings

Settings

If this cable was not provided with your TTY device,
contact your TTY device manufacturer to purchase the
connector cable.

79

SPH-D700.book Page 80 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Security Settings

Unlocking Your Device Screen
1. Press

Accessing the Security Menu
All of your device’s security settings are available
through the Security menu. You can secure your data
and limit phone access by requiring a screen unlock
pattern every time your device is turned on or every
time it wakes up from sleep mode (screen where the
screen turns off).
䊳

Press

>
Location & security.

and tap

to awaken the device.

2. Touch and drag the lock icon up or slide the

>

QWERTY keyboard out.

Your Device’s Unlock Pattern Feature
You can increase your device’s security by creating a
screen unlock pattern (disabled by default). When
enabled, you must draw the correct unlock pattern on
the screen to unlock and regain access to the device.

Creating an Unlock Pattern

Your Device’s Screen Lock Feature

1. Press

Locking Your Device Screen

2. Scroll down to the menu list and tap Set unlock

When your device is locked, you can only receive
incoming calls or make calls to 911.

3. Read the information on the screen, and then tap

䊳

80

Press
. Locking the screen prevents
accidental screen touches from activating phone
functions.

2C. Settings

>
Location & security.

and tap

>

pattern.
Next.

SPH-D700.book Page 81 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

tutorial on pattern
creation, and then tap
Next.

5. Draw your pattern by

8. Confirm the new pattern by redrawing it and then
tapping Confirm.
Once the feature is enabled, additional unlock pattern
options are then enabled from within the Security &
location menu list.

touching your first
onscreen point. Then,

Configuring the Unlock Pattern Settings

without removing your
finger from the screen,

To require the pattern for access:

drag your finger over
adjacent points until
the gray trace line
overlaps each point
and they are
highlighted with a
green circle.
Important: You must slide your finger on the screen to create
the pattern and not touch individual dots. If you
make a mistake or a point is not properly
selected, a red circle will appear.

1. Press

>
Location & security.

vertical, horizontal or diagonal direction, lift your
finger from the screen.

>

2. Place a checkmark adjacent to the Require pattern
field.
To remove the visible unlock pattern from the Lock screen:

1. Press

>
Location & security.

and tap

>

2. Remove the checkmark adjacent to the Use visible
pattern field.
䡲

6. When you have connected at least four dots in a

and tap

Settings

4. Review the onscreen

Removing this checkmark prevents the unlock
pattern from displaying on the unlock screen
when you draw it to unlock the screen.

7. Tap Continue to record the pattern.
2C. Settings

81

SPH-D700.book Page 82 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Tip: You can also enable or disable tactile feedback
(vibration) for the unlock pattern with the Use tactile
feedback option.

What to do if you have forgotten your pattern:
If you fail to draw the correct unlock pattern on the
screen after five attempts, you are prompted to wait for
30 seconds before you can try again.
䊳

If you have forgotten your screen unlock pattern,
tap Forgot pattern?.
䡲 Sign in using your Google account name and
password, and create a new screen unlock
pattern before regaining access to the Home
screen.

Changing the Unlock Pattern
1. Press

>
and tap
>
Location & security > Change unlock pattern.

2. Draw the current pattern on the screen.
3. Draw and repeat a new pattern. (See “Creating an
Unlock Pattern” on page 80.)

82

2C. Settings

Calling in Lock Mode
When your device is locked, you can only receive
incoming calls or make calls to 911or Sprint Customer
Service.

1. Press

to reveal the lock screen.

Note: The Unlock Pattern applies if the Require Pattern
setting is enabled.

2. Tap Emergency call to reveal the Emergency
Keypad to place your emergency call.
Draw your unlock pattern to regain access to the
full dialer and unlock the device.

䡲

Using Visible Passwords
When enabled, this feature allows you to view the text
being entered into a password field as you type it. So
many times there are other applications that insert an
asterisk (*) as you type. This can be confusing and can
cause issues. What if you mistyped the password or
used the wrong case? When enabled, you can see
what you are entering. This feature is enabled by
default.

SPH-D700.book Page 83 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

1. Press

>
Location & security.

and tap

䡲

>

2. Tap Visible passwords (to remove the checkmark
on the option).

Managing Your Available Memory
You can manage the information and configuration
related to both your microSD card and built-in device
storage memory.

To view your microSD card storage information:

1. Press

>
and tap
SD card & phone storage.

>
and tap
SD card & phone storage.

3. Review the available fields:
䡲

space information:
External SD card displays the memory information
specific to an installed microSD card. This
amount of space can be altered by replacing the
current microSD card.

Total space indicates the total size of the currently

inserted microSD card. This includes both
available and used space information.
● To determine the amount of memory currently
used on the card, take the total space and
subtract the remaining available space.

>

2. Review the two memory sections for available
䡲

>

2. Locate the External SD card section.

To view your device’s total available memory:

1. Press

Internal phone storage displays the memory
information specific to the built-in device memory.
This memory amount can not be altered because
it is part of the device hardware.

Note: Not all of the microSD card is registered in the available
space, as a small percentage of the storage is unread.
A 16GB microSD card will show approximately
14.73GB of total space.
䡲

Available space indicates the amount of remaining
free memory space available on the microSD
card.

2C. Settings

83

Settings

To disable visible passwords:

SPH-D700.book Page 84 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Unmount SD card allows you to “unmount” the
microSD card from its communication to the
device. This severs the connection so the card
can be safely removed or reformatted.
䡲 Format SD card allows you to format (erase data
from) the microSD card. This can only be done
after a card that has been properly unmounted.
䡲

To view your device’s storage information:

1. Press

>
and tap
SD card & phone storage.

>

2. Locate the Internal phone storage section indicating
the available storage space within the device’s
memory.

Manage Running Services
This service is an efficient method for managing power
consumption and processor/memory resources.
Processes can be stopped until the device is restarted.
To stop a currently running service:

1. Press

>
and tap
Applications > Running services.

2. Tap an onscreen process entry.
84

2C. Settings

3. Read the Stop service? dialog and touch Stop.
Note: These stopped processes are restarted once the
device is restarted (power cycled).
Third-party Task Manager applications are also
available from the Google Marketplace.

Using the Task Manager
Sometimes your device might seem to slow down over
time, and the biggest reason for this are background
applications. These are applications that were not
properly closed or shutdown and are still active but
minimized. The Task Manager not only lets you see
which of these applications are still active in the
background but also easily lets you choose which
applications are left running and which are closed.
To shutdown a current application:

1. Press and hold

.

2. Tap Task Manager. This screen contains the
following tabs:

>

䡲

Active applications display those currently active

applications running on your device.

SPH-D700.book Page 85 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Package displays any installed packages or

applications from the Market that are taking up
memory space. Tap Uninstall to remove them
from your device.
䡲 Summary displays a visual graph indicating the
available and used space within the Random
Access Memory (RAM), Program, and External SD
card.
䡲 Help provides additional battery saving
techniques.

3. From the Active applications tab, tap End to close
selected applications or tap End all to close all
background running applications.

Erasing Device Content
Use the Manage applications menu to quickly erase
selected content and uninstall third-party applications
stored in your device.

2. Press

and tap Sort by size. This option sorts
the current Manage applications listing to display
those applications by amount of memory or cache
usage.
– or –
and tap Filter. This option sorts the
Press
listed applications and processes based on one of
three available filters: All, Running, or Downloaded.

Note: Those applications with the largest usage appear at the
top of the sorted list. If not all applications or processes
are visible, select Filter > All.

3. Tap the application whose cache you wish to
delete.

4. From the Application info screen, tap Clear data
and/or Clear defaults.

Settings

䡲

To clear an application’s cache:

1. Press

>
and tap
>
Applications > Manage applications.

2C. Settings

85

SPH-D700.book Page 86 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

To uninstall third-party applications:

1. Press

>
and tap
>
Applications > Manage applications.

Important: Only third-party applications can be uninstalled.
Applications preinstalled on the device can not be
removed.

2. Tap the third-party application, and from the
Application info screen, tap Uninstall.

Resetting Your Device
Resetting the device restores all the factory defaults,
including the ringer types and display settings. All data,
including downloaded applications are deleted.
Important: Back up your important data before you perform
a factory reset of the device.

1. Press

>
and tap
> Privacy >
Factory data reset. (You will see a disclaimer.)

2. Read the disclaimer and tap Reset phone.
3. If you are certain that you would like to restore all
factory settings, tap Erase everything.

86

2C. Settings

SPH-D700.book Page 87 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Call in progress: Indicates there is

Call Log

2D. Call Log

The Notification area of the Home screen (upper-left)
displays phone notifications, status, or alerts such as:
a call currently active and in
progress.

⽧

Viewing Call Log (page 87)

Missed Call: Indicates an incoming

⽧

Call Log Options (page 88)

call was missed.

⽧

Making a Call From Call Log (page 90)

⽧

Saving a Number From Call Log (page 90)

⽧

Altering a Number From Call Log (page 91)

1. Press

⽧

Erasing the Call Log (page 91)

2. Tap an entry to view available options.

Viewing Call Log
Call Log (History) is a list of the phone numbers (or
Contacts entries) for calls you placed, accepted, or
missed. Call log makes redialing a number fast and
easy. It is continually updated as your device
automatically adds new numbers to the beginning of
the list and removes the oldest entries from the bottom
of the list.

To access the Call log:
and tap

>

Call log

.

Note: Call log records only calls that occur while the device is
turned on. If a call is received while your device is
turned off, it will not be included in history.

From within the Call log screen, each entry contains the
phone number (if it is available) and Contacts entry
name (if the number is in your Contacts).

2D. Call Log

87

SPH-D700.book Page 88 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Dialed: Indicates all outgoing calls

made from your device.
Received: Indicates any received

calls that were answered.
Missed: Indicates any missed calls.

These are routed to your voicemail.

Accessing Call Log From Notifications
You can also access the Call log from a Missed Call
notification. (See “Using the Notifications Panel” on
page 40.)

1. Locate

from the Notifications area of the

Status bar.

2. Touch and hold the Status bar, and then slide your
finger down the screen.

3. Tap the Missed call entry to open the Call log
screen.

88

2D. Call Log

Call Log Options
This list provides easy access to redial an entry, or you
can also choose to access two types of history entry
lists depending on how they are touched.
䢇 Tap an entry from the list and tap Call to quickly
redial the selected entry. (See “Making a Call From
Call Log” on page 90.)

SPH-D700.book Page 89 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

call options
(tap)

䢇

䢇

Tap a contact entry name or number to reveal the
call options screen:
䡲 Call allows you to redial the entry by name or
number.

Send message allows you to create a new text

䡲

Send email allows you to create a new email that

is then addressed to the entry’s available email
address.
䡲 Time provides the time and date of the call and its
duration.
䡲 Create contact to save the number if it is not
already in your Contacts. (See “Saving a Number
From Call Log” on page 90.)
䡲 Update existing to save the number to a preexisting Contacts entry.
Touch and hold an entry to display the entry-specific
context menu:
䡲 Call [Number] to redial the current phone number.
䡲 Send message allows you to create a new text
message to the selected entry.
䡲 Edit number before call to make alterations to the
current phone number prior to redial. (See
“Altering a Number From Call Log” on page 91.)
䡲 Add to Contacts to save the number if it is not
already in your Contacts. (See “Saving a Number
From Call Log” on page 90.)

2D. Call Log

89

Call Log

message to the selected entry.

Call log screen

entry-specific context menu
(touch and hold)

䡲

SPH-D700.book Page 90 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

View contact to view the information for the
currently stored Contacts entry.
䡲 Remove to delete the entry from the Call Log list.
䡲

Making a Call From Call Log

Tap a Call log entry > Update existing to save the
number to an existing entry.

2. Tap a destination type
(Phone, Google, or
Corporate).

3. Tap the First name and
1. Press

and tap

>

Call log

.

2. Tap an entry, and then tap Call.
– or –
Touch and hold an entry name/number from the
list, and then tap Call [Number].
Note: You cannot make calls from the Call log to entries
identified as Unknown, No ID, Restricted or Private
Number.

Saving a Number From Call Log
1. Tap a Call log entry > Create contact.
– or –
Touch and hold an entry > Add to Contacts.
– or –

90

2D. Call Log

Last name fields and enter

a name for the contact.

4. Tap Save when you have
finished entering
information for the contact.
Note: The option to select a destination is only available if you
have previously established a Google or Corporate
account on the device.

After you have saved the number, your device displays
the new Contacts entry in place of the previous
number. (See “Contacts Entry Options” on page 98.)
Note: You cannot save phone numbers already in your
Contacts or from calls identified as Unknown, No ID,
Restricted or Private Number.

Altering a Number From Call Log

Erasing the Call Log

If you need to make a call from Call log and you need
to alter the number prior to dialing, you can add the
appropriate prefix by prepending the number.

You can delete either an individual call log entry or all
current entries from the Call log list.

1. Press

and tap

>

Call log

.

2. Touch and hold an entry to access the
entry-specific options menu.

4. Edit the number using the onscreen dialpad or

5. Tap

1. Press

and tap

>

Call log

.

2. Touch and hold an entry and tap Remove.
To clear all entries from the Call log list:

3. Tap Edit number before call.
delete digits by pressing
numbers.

To clear a single entry from the Call log list:

to erase the

1. Press

and tap

2. Press

and touch Delete.

>

Call log

.

3. Tap Select all > Delete > Yes.

once the number has been changed.

Note: To edit a number and save it to Contacts, tap View
contact in step 2 above, and then edit the number and
tap Save. (See “Editing a Contacts Entry” on page 99.)

2D. Call Log

91

Call Log

SPH-D700.book Page 91 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

SPH-D700.book Page 92 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Important: To verify your Contacts appear on your device,

2E. Contacts
⽧

Creating a New Contacts Entry (page 92)

⽧

Saving a Phone Number (page 94)

⽧

Confirming Contact Synchronization (page 94)

⽧

Groups (page 96)

⽧

Contacts Menu Options (page 97)

⽧

Contacts Entry Options (page 98)

⽧

Editing a Contacts Entry (page 99)

⽧

Adding a Number to a Contacts Entry (page 100)

⽧

Editing a Contacts Entry’s Number (page 100)

⽧

Sending Contacts (page 101)

⽧

Assigning a Picture to an Entry (page 101)

⽧

Deleting Entries (page 102)

⽧

Adding Entries to Your Favorites (page 102)

⽧

Adding Facebook Content to your Contacts (page 102)

92

2E. Contacts

you must sync your email accounts after setup
(Settings > Accounts & sync). (See “Confirming
Contact Synchronization” on page 94.)

Creating a New Contacts Entry
If existing Google and
Corporate email accounts
have been synchronized to
your device, these will be
made available to your device
during the creation of new
entries. These new Contacts
entries can be assigned or
saved to synced accounts
such as Phone, Google, or Corporate.
Note: The option to select a destination is only available once
you have established a Google or Corporate account
on the device.

Your device automatically sorts the Contacts entries
alphabetically. You can create either a Phone, Google or
Corporate contact.

SPH-D700.book Page 93 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Phone contacts are stored locally on the device.
WARNING: If the device is ever reset to its factory default
parameters, locally stored contacts can be lost.

䢇

䢇

Google contacts are shared with your existing

Google account and can also be imported to your
device after you have created a Google Mail account.
Corporate (also known as Work or Outlook) contacts
are those contacts that are intended to be shared
with either an Exchange Server or from within
Microsoft® Outlook®.

1. Press

and tap

.

4. Tap the First name and Last name fields, and enter
a name for the new entry.

5. Tap the label button (to the left of the Phone
number field) to select a category such as: Mobile
(default) , Home, Work, Work fax, Pager, Assistant, or
Other, or tap Custom.

6. Tap a phone number field and enter a phone
number.
Tap Add phone number to enter additional phone
numbers for the new Contacts entry.

䡲

䡲

2. From the top of the screen, tap Create contact.
Shortcut: Enter a phone number from the keypad and
press
> Add to contacts > Create contact.
Proceed with steps 3–5.

3. Tap a destination type (Phone, Google, or
Corporate).
Note: You will not see the option to select a destination unless
you have previously established a Google or Corporate
account on the device.

Tap
on the QWERTY keyboard to remove a
previously entered phone number.

7. Enter additional information such as: Email
addresses, IM chat addresses, Group assignment,
Ring tone, Company, Job Title or Add more fields to

input additional category information.
Use your finger to slide the page up or down to
see additional fields and categories.

䡲

8. Tap Save to complete and store the new entry.
After saving the number, your device displays the new
entry within the Contact list. (See “Contacts Entry
Options” on page 98.)

2E. Contacts

93

Contacts

䢇

SPH-D700.book Page 94 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

4. Tap a destination type (Phone, Google, or

Tip: ICE – In Case of Emergency
To make it easier for emergency personnel to identify
important contacts, you can list your local emergency
contacts under “ICE” in your device’s Contacts list. For
example, if your mother is your primary emergency
contact, list her as “ICE–Mom” in your Contacts. To list
more than one emergency contact, use “ICE1–___,”
“ICE2–___,” etc.

Saving a Phone Number
To save a number from the keypad:

1. Press

and tap

.

2. Enter a phone number using either the onscreen
dialpad or QWERTY keyboard.

3. Tap Add to Contacts > Create contact or Update

Corporate).
Note: You will not see the option to select a destination unless
you have previously established a Google or Corporate
account on the device.

5. Tap the First name and Last name fields, and enter
a name for the new entry.

6. Tap the label button (to the left of the Phone
number field) to select a category such as: Mobile
(default) , Home, Work, Work fax, Pager, Assistant, or
Other, or tap Custom.

7. Tap Save to complete and store the new entry.

Confirming Contact
Synchronization

existing.

– or –
Press

and tap Add to Contacts > Create
contact or Update existing.
䡲 If you're updating an existing contact, proceed to
step 6.

94

2E. Contacts

Syncing data from your managed accounts allows you
to add and manage a new or existing contact from
your online or remote accounts to your device. Prior to
syncing, you must first have an active Google or
Corporate account with current Contact entries, and be
signed into your account via the device.

SPH-D700.book Page 95 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Note: Any change on either side (Phone, Gmail, or
Corporate/Outlook Contacts), is reflected on the other
side after a sync process.

For more information about syncing existing managed
accounts, see “Synchronizing Accounts” on page 73.

1. Press

>
Accounts & sync.

and tap

The process of updating your Contacts tab can take
several minutes. If after 10-20 minutes, your list has not
been updated, repeat step 2-3.

>

2. Locate the email account containing the contacts
you wish to synchronize.

3. Tap

within the adjacent account field to
reveal the account’s synchronization settings
screen.

4. To synchronize Gmail Contacts, tap Sync Contacts.

5. Your Contacts tab then reflects any updated
Contact information.
This update process works both ways. For
example, any changes on the device are updated
to your Gmail Contacts list after sync.

䡲

Note: Syncing of contacts requires you are logged into your
Gmail and Corporate accounts via the device.

A green checkmark indicates the feature is
enabled.
– or –
To synchronize Corporate Contacts, tap Sync
Contacts. A green checkmark indicates the feature
is enabled.

2E. Contacts

95

Contacts

With syncing, any Contacts entries (with phone
numbers, email addresses, pictures, etc.) are updated
and synced with your Epic 4G.

SPH-D700.book Page 96 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Contacts tab

Contact entry’s
Overview page

Groups
This feature allows you to add a new or existing contact
to a call group. This group can be one of the already
present groups (Family, Friends, or Work) or a usercreated group.
To create a new group:

1. Press

and tap

> Groups.

2. If prompted, select a type (Phone, Google,
Corporate, etc.).

3. Press

and tap Create.

4. Tap the Group field, and enter a name for the new
group.

5. Tap Ringtone and select a ringtone for the group.
6. Tap Save to store the newly created group.
To add an existing contact to a current group:

1. Press
Contact Group

Contact Details

and tap
> Groups > [type] (if
prompted) > [name of group].

2. Tap Add member.

96

2E. Contacts

SPH-D700.book Page 97 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

want to add or tap Select all. (A green check-mark
appears next to the selected entries.)

4. Tap Add to add the contact(s) to your group.
5. Touch an existing group.
To send a message to a group:

1. Press

and tap

> Groups.

2. If prompted, select a type
(Phone, Google, Corporate,
etc.).

3. Tap an existing group, and
press

> Send

message.

4. Select the recipients of the
new message (indicated
by a green checkmark).

5. Tap Send.
6. Type your message, and tap Send.

Contacts Menu Options
1. Press

and tap

.

2. Touch and hold an entry
and select from the
available contact menu
options:
䡲 Edit to edit the currently
selected Contacts entry.
(See “Editing a Contacts
Entry” on page 99.)
䡲 Delete to erase the
currently selected
Contacts entry. (See
“Deleting Entries” on
page 102.)
䡲 Link contact to link the current contact to another
current contact. Similar to a “see also” feature. If
you can’t remember a contact’s information,
linking entries can help you find the person you
are looking for.

2E. Contacts

97

Contacts

3. From the list of contacts, tap the contact(s) you

SPH-D700.book Page 98 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Mark as default to assign one the entry’s available
numbers as the default (main) contact number.
䡲 Add to favorites to copy the current Contacts entry
to the list within the Favorites tab (page 102).
䡲 Remove from favorites to remove the current
Contacts entry from the Favorites tab.
䡲 Send namecard via to send the current Contact
entry’s information to an external recipient via
either Bluetooth, Email (Exchange or Internet), or
Gmail. (See “Sending Contacts via Bluetooth” on
page 146.)
䡲

Note: Prior to using the Bluetooth feature, it must first be
enabled, and the recipient’s device must be visible.
In addition to Contact’s information, other file types
(video, image, or audio) can be sent using Bluetooth.
䡲

Add to group to add the Contact to a group

(page 96).

98

2E. Contacts

Contacts Entry Options
1. Press

and tap

.

2. Touch an entry to display
the Contact entry’s
overview screen. This
screen contains Name,
contact numbers, email,
and linked contact
information.

3. Press

to reveal the
context menu specific to
this entry.

4. Tap an available option.
(See “Contacts Menu
Options” on page 97 for
descriptions.)

Entry’s Overview screen

SPH-D700.book Page 99 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Note: When editing a Corporate contact entry, the following
category entries appear within the Add more fields
option: Nickname, Postal address, Web address,
Birthday, Anniversary, and Note.

1. From the Contact’s overview screen, press
and tap Edit.

2. Tap an option, such as First Name or Email
address, to begin editing.
䡲

[image icon] to assign a picture to the entry. (See

“Assigning a Picture to an Entry” on page 101.)
First name/Last name to edit the current name.
䡲 Phone number to add or delete a phone number.
(See “Adding a Number to a Contacts Entry” on
page 100.)
䡲 Email address to add or delete an email address.
䡲 Google Talk to assign an existing Google IM client
contact name.
䡲 Groups to edit the group association.
䡲 Ringtone to assign a unique ringtone to the entry.
䡲 Company to enter business information such as
company name.
䡲 Job Title to enter the contact’s current business
job title/position.
䡲

䡲

Nickname to enter a nickname for the contact.

Address to enter a physical address for the
contact. Choose from Home, Work, Other, or
Custom.
䡲 Note to add additional information for the contact.
䡲 Add more fields to add additional categories such
as: Postal address, Web address, Birthday, and
Anniversary.
䡲

Note: Some fields may appear in different order or within the
Add more fields menu.

3. Tap Save to store your updates.

2E. Contacts

99

Contacts

Editing a Contacts Entry

SPH-D700.book Page 100 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Adding a Number to a Contacts
Entry
1. From the Contact’s overview screen, press
and tap Edit.

2. From the phone numbers area, tap Add phone

Editing a Contacts Entry’s Number
1. From the Contact’s overview screen, press
and tap Edit.

2. Tap an existing phone number field.
Note: Touch and hold the Phone number field to activate the
Edit text menu.

number to create a new empty Phone number field

within the selected phone number category.

3. Tap the label button (to the left of the Phone
number field) to select a category such as: Mobile
(default) , Home, Work, Work fax, Pager, Assistant, or
Other, or tap Custom.

4. Tap the Phone number field to enter the new
number.

5. Tap Save to update the new number to the existing
Contacts entry.

100

2E. Contacts

3. Tap

to clear one digit at a time.

4. Re-enter or edit the number using the onscreen
dialpad.

5. Tap Save to update the number to the existing
Contacts entry.

SPH-D700.book Page 101 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

1. Press
tap

and

.

2. Touch an entry to open
its overview page.

3. Press

and tap

Send namecard via to

send the current Contact
entry’s information to an
external recipient via
either:
䡲 Bluetooth to transmit this
contact to another
bluetooth-compatible
device.
䡲 Email to attach the
contact card to a new
outgoing email
(Exchange or Internet).

䡲

Gmail to attach the contact card to a new

outgoing Internet-based email.

Assigning a Picture to an Entry
Assign a picture to display each time a certain contact
calls you.
Assigning a picture via the device:

1. From the Contact’s overview screen, press
and tap Edit.

Contacts

Sending Contacts

2. Tap a contact image (upper-left).
䡲

Open an image location and tap an onscreen
image to prepare it for use.
● Press
to return to the Select picture
page where you can now select the new
image.

3. Touch and drag along the sides of the yellow
border box to begin cropping the desired area,
and then tap Save to assign selected picture.

2E. Contacts

101

SPH-D700.book Page 102 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Applying a picture to your Google Contact from within your
online Gmail:

1. Log into your Gmail account and go to your
Contacts page.

2. Select your Contacts entry (with a checkmark) and
click the image area (Change Picture).

3. Click Browse to locate a local copy of your image.
䡲

You can also choose an image from other
sources such as Picasa® Web.

4. Crop the visible area of your selected picture and
click Apply Changes.

5. Sync your new contact from your online Gmail to
your device. See “Confirming Contact
Synchronization” on page 94.

Deleting Entries
1. From the Contact’s overview screen touch and
hold an entry from the list

2. From the Contacts Entry context menu, tap Delete.
3. Tap OK to confirm the deletion.
102

2E. Contacts

Adding Entries to Your Favorites
The Favorites tab is a listing that can help you quickly
access your most used or preferred Contacts entries.

1. Press

and tap

.

2. Touch and hold the entry name from the Contacts
tab listing.

3. From the Contacts Entry context menu, tap Add to
favorites.
Note: Another method to add or remove an entry from your
favorites is to toggle the state of the star icon on the
Contact’s details page (upper-right). Tap to add the
entry to your favorites (star is lit), tap again to remove.

Adding Facebook Content to your
Contacts
You can now add your Facebook contact information,
such as pictures, email, and phone numbers directly to
your Contacts list. All of their current contact
information is then migrated over to your phone.

SPH-D700.book Page 103 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Note: You must first have an active Facebook page
populated with friends sharing their contact information.

If a Contacts entry already exists in with a slightly
different name, separate entries are created and can
later be linked (joined) together into a single entry.

and tap

.
and tap Get

friends > Add account > Add account.

>

(Facebook).

2. Tap I agree to accept the terms of the End-User
License Agreement.

3. Enter your account’s access Email and Password
information. and tap Login.

4. Press

and tap Home > Friends to confirm
your current friends list.

Adding Your Facebook Friends to Your
Contacts
Before you can add your friends, you must add your
Facebook account to the list of managed and
synchronized accounts. This process is similar to
synchronizing your email accounts.

section of the Add an account screen.
This process adds your Facebook account to the
list of managed and synchronized accounts. In
this case for the purpose of maintain your
Facebook contacts synchronized with your
device’s Contacts list.

䡲

Contacts

and tap

1. Press

2. From the Contact’s tab, press

3. Tap Facebook from the Integrated contact accounts

Log into Facebook
1. Press

This process not only synchronizes your contact
information but also your status, events, and more.

4. Tap Next and enter your account’s Email and
Password information.

5. Tap Log in to begin the synchronization process.
6. Select a sync interval (from 1 hour to Once a day)
and tap Next.

7. Tap those setting you wish to synchronize (all are
enabled by default). A green checkmark indicates
the feature is enabled.

2E. Contacts

103

SPH-D700.book Page 104 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

䡲

Choose from: Sync Contacts, Add all friends, or
Sync Calendar.

8. Tap Done to save these settings and return to
Accounts and sync screen.

9. Press

and tap
to confirm your
Facebook contacts are new synchronized and
appear in your Contacts list.

1. Press

and tap

.

2. Tap an entry from the list you wish to use as your
main source of contact information. This
“duplicate” entry will be used as your primary
Contacts entry. Its Contact image, phone and email
address will be used as the primary for this
contact.
Note: In the case of Facebook contacts, if you prefer to use
their image, phone, email, and other personal
information as your main source for the selected
contact, its is recommended that you select this
Facebook contact as your main Contacts entry in
step 2.

Linking Multiple Contact Entries
Linking similar contact entries allows you consolidate
listed entries. Multiple entries such as: Alex Home, Alex
At Work, Alex S., can be consolidated or joined into a
Single Alex entry listing.
When synchronizing Facebook friends to your existing
Contacts list, some friend names may not match your
current list names.
Note: If friends do not have a posted phone number, then
only their email address will be added.

104

2E. Contacts

3. From the Contact entry’s overview screen,
press

and tap Link contact > Show all

contacts.

4. Tap the duplicate Contacts entry.
䡲

This duplicate entry is then merged into the
previous entry. The previous image, email, phone
numbers, are kept as the primary and
supplemented by your newly “joined” entry.

SPH-D700.book Page 105 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Unlinking Contacts
1. Press

and tap

.

2. Tap an entry from the Contacts list.
3. From the Contact entry’s overview screen,
press

and tap the linked Contacts area.
Contacts

Note: The number of linked contacts appear within the
Linked Contacts area, ex: 2 linked contacts. The source
of those contacts are also shown (ex: Google,
Facebook, etc..)

4. Tap

to remove a selected contact source
from the current entry. The removed entry then
re-appears within the Contacts list.

2E. Contacts

105

SPH-D700.book Page 106 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

2F. Calendar & Tools

Google Calendar is an application that synchronizes
new and existing entries between your device and your
online Google account.

Calendar
⽧

Before You Begin (page 106)

⽧

Calendar (page 106)

Synchronizing Corporate Calendar Events

⽧

My Files (page 112)

⽧

Memo (page 113)

⽧

Alarm Clock (page 113)

⽧

Calculator (page 115)

⽧

Updating Your Device Firmware (page 115)

Corporate calendars are not synchronized to your
device by default; this account type must be manually
added. Although we previously described how to add a
corporate account to your list of managed accounts,
this only allows your device to track that account type’s
email.

⽧

Updating Your Android Operating System (page 117)

⽧

Updating Your Profile (page 118)

⽧

Updating Your PRL (page 118)

Before You Begin
Prior to using Google applications such as Gmail and
calendar, you will need to have an active Google
account (page 55).

106

2F. Calendar & Tools

Calendar events must be added and tracked by your
device separately.
To add corporate calendar events to your device’s
managed account tracking:

1. Press

>
Accounts & sync.

and tap

>

SPH-D700.book Page 107 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Managed accounts area of the screen.
䡲 If not present, you will have to add this account
(page 74).

3. Tap

within the Corporate account field to
reveal the account’s synchronization settings
screen.

4. Tap Sync Calendar to activate the synchronization
of calendar events between your device and the
remote exchange server. A green checkmark
indicates the feature is enabled.
Note: It might be necessary to toggle the feature on and off to
force a re-sync.

To manually sync your calendar events to a managed
corporate account:

1. Press

>
Accounts & sync.

2. Tap

and tap

>

within the Corporate account field.

3. Tap the green checkmark to toggle it off then back
on. (See “Synchronizing Your Corporate Account”
on page 74.)

Configuring Calendar Settings
1. Press
2. Tap

and tap

JANUARY

(Calendar).

> Settings.

3. Tap an onscreen option:
䡲

Calendars displays the currently managed

accounts. Tap an entry to change the sync state
of the account.
䡲 Calendar sync provides access to the sync
settings screen where you can enable/disable the
sync status of your managed accounts and add
more accounts.
䡲 Default view configures the current Calendar
default view for events. Month view is the default.
Choose from: Month, Week, Day or List.
䡲 Day views configures how the available events are
displayed onscreen. Choose from Time grid or
Event list.
䡲 First day of week sets the calendar week to start
with either Sunday or Monday.
䡲 Hide declined events hides (checked) or displays
(unchecked) those events that have been
declined via the calendar application.

2F. Calendar & Tools

Calendar / Tools

2. Locate the corporate email account within the

107

SPH-D700.book Page 108 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Adding an Event to the Calendar
Your Calendar helps you organize your time and
reminds you of important events.

1. Press

and tap

JANUARY

(Calendar).

Note: To synchronize calendar events among your Google
and Corporate accounts, make sure they are being
managed by your device (page 73).

2. Tap a day to which you would like to add an event
and press
and tap Create.
The default view for the Calendar is the Month
view.
䡲 To change the view, tap the available tabs along
the top (in portrait view) or the left (in landscape
view) of the Calendar screen. Choose from Month,
Week, Day, and List.
䡲

3. Tap the Event field and enter a title for the event.
4. Select a From/To date for the event by tapping the
corresponding fields, and adjusting the month, day,
and year by tapping
or
.
䡲 Tap Set when finished.

Views

5. Select a time for the event by tapping the time field
and then adjusting the hour and minute by tapping
or
.
䡲

Calendar Menu Options

䡲

Tap the AM or PM button to change the value.
Tap Set when finished.

6. Tap the All day field to assign this as an all day
event. If assigned as an all day event, the time
fields are removed as options.

108

2F. Calendar & Tools

SPH-D700.book Page 109 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

account by tapping the Calendar field and then
selecting an account. For this example we are
choosing a Google account.
䡲 My calendar are calendar entries that are stored
locally on the device and not part of an email
account.
䡲 Google/Gmail are calendar entries that are
synchronized between your device and your
online Google account.
䡲 Corporate are calendar entries that are
synchronized between your device and either an
Exchange Server or available from within
Microsoft® Outlook®.
䡲 Important are calendar entries that are
synchronized between your device and assigned
to an important category.
䡲 default calendar are calendar entries that are
synchronized between your device and your
default email account.

Note: Some of the previous options appear when compatible
email accounts (such as Outlook) have been created
and synced. If also supported, additional categories
appear: Business, Red Category+, Important, and
Personal.
䡲

Tap OK when finished.

8. Enter a location for the event in the Location field.
9. Assign participants by either entering an email
address directly into the participants field or
selecting from one of the four available sources:
䡲 Contact allows you to choose participants from
your current pool of available contacts (local and
managed accounts). Tap entries and tap Add.
䡲 Group allows you to choose participants by
selecting the main group categories. Participants
assigned to those groups are then automatically
added and notified of your new event. Tap entries
and tap Add.
䡲 Search allows you to search for recipients from
within your available email contacts of the
currently assigned email account
(step 7). Tap entries and tap Add.

2F. Calendar & Tools

Calendar / Tools

7. Assign the new calendar event to a current

109

SPH-D700.book Page 110 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Note: The Search option appears when the calendar type is
set to Corporate.
䡲

Recently allows you to select from recent email
recipients. Tap entries and tap Add.

Note: When you add participants to a Calendar event, an
email invitation is sent to the participants' email when
the event it saved.

10. Select an alarm time by tapping the Alarm field.
䡲

䡲

Select None, On time, 5 mins before, 15 mins
before, 1 hour before, 1 day before, 2 days before,
1 week before, or Customize.
Customize allows you to manually enter a desired
number. Tap Set to complete the custom

assignment.

11. Select a recurrence cycle for the event by tapping
the Repeat field.
䡲 Select One-time event, Daily, Every weekday
(Mon-Fri), Weekly (every [day]), Monthly (every
[Number Day]), Monthly (on day [Number]), and
Yearly (on [Month Day]).

12. Enter a description for the event in the Description
field.

110

2F. Calendar & Tools

13. Tap Save to store the new event and synchronize it
with your selected account.

Event Reminders
When your device is turned on and you have an event
alarm scheduled, there are several ways your device
alerts you to scheduled events:
䢇 By playing a short beep.
䢇 By illuminating the backlight.
䢇 By indicating a
icon within the Status bar.
To view additional options:

1. Tap the Status bar, and then slide your finger down
the screen to open the Notifications panel.

2. Tap the upcoming event name from the onscreen
list to display the event within the Calendar
notifications screen.

3. Tap an option.
䡲

Snooze all to snooze all event reminders for five

minutes.
䡲

Dismiss all to dismiss all event reminders.

SPH-D700.book Page 111 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Press
to keep these reminders in place
and close the Notifications panel.

Editing an Existing Event
1. Press

Viewing Events
1. Press

and tap
. Once an event has
been created, entries are shown in the default view.
JANUARY

2. To view a Calendar event farther out, tap either
Week or Month.

JANUARY

.

events. (Your device lists events in chronological
order.)

4. To display an event’s details, tap it from the current
screen.

and tap Edit.

4. Make your modifications (event name, location,
participants, alarm, repetition, etc).
synchronize them with your assigned account.

Erasing a Day’s Events
1. Press

and tap

JANUARY

.

2. Tap the Day tab on the Calendar screen.

Going to the Current Day’s Calendar Menu
From Calendar view, press

3. Press

5. Tap Save to store the new updates and

3. Tap the day for which you would like to view

䊳

and tap

2. Tap an event to reveal its details.

Calendar / Tools

䡲

and tap Today.

Note: If in the Month view (tab), days containing calendar
events are indicated by a blue triangle. Tap a day from
this view to display a list of event within the Day tab.

3. Press

and tap Delete.

4. Tap Select all to delete all events on this day.
– or –
Place a checkmark only on those events you want
deleted.

5. Tap Delete to erase the selected events and then
synchronize this action with your managed
account.

2F. Calendar & Tools

111

SPH-D700.book Page 112 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Erasing All Events
1. Press

and tap

Accessing File Viewer
JANUARY

.

2. From the main Calendar screen (Month tab view),
press

and tap Delete.

3. Tap Select all to delete all events currently available
for this managed account.
– or –
Place a checkmark only on those events you want
deleted.

4. Tap Delete to erase the selected events and then
synchronize this action with your managed
account.

My Files
My Files allows you to view a list from which you can
launch a file if the associated application is already on
your device (ex: MP4 and DivX).
Note: The best recoding setting for MP4 video playback on
this device is H.264 for Android™ or PSP™.

112

2F. Calendar & Tools

䊳

Press
and tap
>
(My Files).
Navigation in this viewer works on a hierarchy
structure with folders, subfolders, etc.

Opening Files in File Viewer
1. Press

and tap

>

(My Files).

2. Tap a folder and scroll down or up until you locate
your selected file.
Tap the Up tab to back up into a higher directory.
䡲 Tap the Home tab to back up to the root directory.
䡲 Press
and tap the View by to change the
way the files are displayed onscreen. Choose
from: List, List and details, or Thumbnail.
● Press
for these additional options:
Share, Create folder, Delete, View by, List by,
and More (Move, Copy, Rename, and Settings).
䡲

3. Once you have located your file, tap the file name
to launch the associated application.

SPH-D700.book Page 113 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Memo

Alarm Clock

Your device comes with a memo application that you
can use to compose and store reminders and notes to
help keep you organized.

Your device comes with a built-in alarm clock that has
multiple alarm capabilities. There is no limit to the
number of alarm events you can create.

1. Press

1. Press

and tap

>

(Memo).

device, touch the Create memo button to create a new
memo.

text using either the QWERTY keyboard or
onscreen keyboard.

4. Tap Save to store the new memo.

(Alarm Clock).

2. To activate an alarm, tap the checkmark to the
right of the alarm.
Note: A new alarm can also be created from the Alarm page
by pressing

3. Adjust the paper color by tapping one of the five
available colors.

>

three alarm presets are set up by default and ready for
you to customize. These alarms are turned off by
default.

Note: If there is already a previously stored memo on the

2. Tap the onscreen text field and enter your desired

and tap

Note: Upon your first launch of the Alarm Clock application,

Calendar / Tools

To compose a memo:

> Add alarm.

3. To edit an alarm, tap the entry and then tap the
Time field to adjust the alarm time.
䡲

Adjust the hour and minute by tapping either
or
.

䡲

Tap the AM or PM button to change the value.
Tap Set when finished.

䡲

2F. Calendar & Tools

113

SPH-D700.book Page 114 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Note: The number of hours and minutes left before the alarm
goes off is briefly displayed onscreen after you set the
new alarm time.

4. Tap Ringtone to select an audio ringtone that will
sound with the alarm.
䡲 Tap a ringtone to hear an audio sample.
䡲 Tap OK to accept the ringtone assignment.

5. Tap Vibrate to add a vibration feature to the alarm.
6. Tap the Repeat field to select a repeating status for
the alarm.
Place a checkmark adjacent to the desired
repetition days Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday,
Thursday, Friday, Saturday or Sunday and tap OK.

䡲

7. Select a unique name for this alarm event by
tapping the Label field, entering a new label, and
tapping OK.

8. Tap Done to store the new alarm event.
Note: To allow the alarm to sound even while the device is in
silent mode, press
and tap Settings, and then
activate the Alarm in silent mode field.

114

2F. Calendar & Tools

To delete an Alarm event:

1. Press

and tap

>

.

2. Touch and hold a desired alarm event, tap Delete
alarm, and then tap OK.

To disable an Alarm event:

1. Press

and tap

>

.

2. Touch and hold a desired alarm event and tap
Disable alarm.

– or –
Tap the green checkmark next to an active alarm
to cancel it.
To customize the onscreen clock:

1. Press

and tap

>

.

2. Tap the onscreen alarm clock (top of Alarm Clock
screen).

3. Scroll your finger across the bottom field to
temporarily view each selection.

4. Tap the desired image to activate the new clock
face.

SPH-D700.book Page 115 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

To hide the onscreen clock:

Note: These advanced panel features are also available

and tap

2. Press

and tap Hide clock.

>

when the keyboard is opened in Landscape mode.

.

Updating Your Device Firmware

Calculator
Your device comes with a built-in calculator.

1. Press

and tap

>

(Calculator).

2. Enter numbers using your keyboard or by tapping
an onscreen key.

3. Press and hold

on the QWERTY keyboard to

clear all numbers.
– or –
Touch and hold
to clear all numbers.
䡲 Tap C (CLEAR) to clear all numbers.
䡲 Orient the device into Landscape mode to view
and use the Advanced panel (left) to access more
advanced features such as sin (Sine), cos
(Cosine), and tan (Tangent), indicated by blue
onscreen buttons.

You can update your device's software using the
Update Firmware option.

Before Updating Your Firmware
Updating your device firmware will erase all user data
from your device. You must back up all critical

information before updating your device firmware.

Back Up All Data Prior to Update
To back up your Gmail information:

1. Press

>
and tap
> Accounts &
sync. (See “Synchronizing Accounts” on page 73.)

2. Tap the Auto-sync option to enable the feature
(checkmark). (See “Configuring Data
Synchronization Settings” on page 195.)

2F. Calendar & Tools

115

Calendar / Tools

1. Press

SPH-D700.book Page 116 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

If the Auto-sync option is on, email, Calendar and
Contacts automatically synchronize whenever a
change is made.
䡲 If the Auto-sync option is off, simply tap
within the account field to reveal the account’s
synchronization settings screen.
䡲

To back up your Exchange Mail information:

1. Press

>
and tap
>
Accounts & sync. (See “Corporate Email (Outlook)”

on page 190 and “Synchronizing Accounts” on
page 73.)

2. Tap

within the Corporate account field to
reveal the account’s synchronization settings
screen.

3. Toggle the onscreen checkmark to manually
synchronize the desired parameters (Contacts or
Calendar).
To back up stored text messages:

1. Press

and tap

.

2. Select the text message from the list to view the
message thread.

116

2F. Calendar & Tools

3. Touch and hold on a text message from the string
Message Options context menu appears.

4. Tap Forward and enter a recipient’s phone number.
To back up your Google applications:
Your Google™ application purchases are reloaded
remotely and can be re-installed after the update is
applied. (See “Using the Android Market” on
page 196.)

1. Log into your Google account via the device.
.

2. Press

and tap

3. Press

and tap Downloads.

4. Scroll through the list of previously downloaded
Google applications and choose the one you wish
to reinstall.

5. Follow the onscreen instructions.
As an added precaution, to preserve any data on your
microSD card, please remove it from your device prior
to starting the update process. (See “Removing the
microSD Card” on page 123.)

SPH-D700.book Page 117 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Updating Your Device Firmware

5. Touch Restart & install to complete the process.

Once you have backed up all your data, use the
Update Firmware option to update your device
firmware.

Note: The Notifications panel can also be opened on the

>
and tap
About phone > System Updates.

Confirm Your Current Device Firmware

>

1. Press

2. Tap Update Firmware. (Your device automatically
downloads and installs any available updates. You
may be required to power your device off and
back on to complete the software upgrade.)
– or –

1. Locate the System Update Available icon (

) in

Notifications.

2. Touch and hold the Status bar, and then slide your
finger down the screen.

3. Tap

and then tapping

to open the System Updates screen.

4. Tap Download and follow the onscreen
instructions. (
appears within the Status bar to
indicate the device is downloading the necessary
files.)

>

and tap

> About phone.

2. Scroll to the bottom of the page and locate the
Baseband version read-only field.

Updating Your Android Operating
System
This option allows you to update the Android Operating
System (OS) on your device via an over-the-air
connection.

1. Press

>
and tap
>
About phone > System Updates > Update Android.

2. Follow the onscreen instructions.
– or –

2F. Calendar & Tools

117

Calendar / Tools

1. Press

Home screen by pressing
Notifications.

SPH-D700.book Page 118 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

1. Locate the Android OS Update Available icon
(

) in Notifications.

2. Touch and hold the Status bar, and then slide your
finger down the screen.

3. Tap the Android update available field.
4. Tap Download and follow the onscreen
instructions.

Updating Your Profile
This option allows you to automatically update your
online user profile information. If you choose to change
your user name and select a new one online, you must
then update the user name on your device.

1. Press

>
and tap
>
About phone > System Updates > Update Profile.

2. Follow the onscreen instructions.
Note: If your data services or account syncing ever seems to
go out unexpectedly, use this feature to reconnect with
the network.

118

2F. Calendar & Tools

Updating Your PRL
This option allows you to download and update the
PRL (preferred roaming list) automatically.

1. Press

>
and tap
>
About phone > System Updates > Update PRL.

2. Follow the onscreen instructions.

SPH-D700.book Page 119 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Activating Voice Dialer

⽧

Voice Dialing (page 119)

⽧

Opening Menus With Voice Dialer (page 121)

⽧

Text-to-Speech (page 121)

⽧

Voice Search (page 122)
Important: The Voice Control (Speech to Action) feature will
not launch if you are currently in an active menu.

Voice Dialing
You can use your device’s built-in automatic speech
recognition (ASR) software, called Voice Dialer, to dial a
phone number in your Contacts or to launch phone
functions. All you have to do is to talk into the phone,
and ASR will recognize your voice and complete tasks
by itself.

䊳

Press

and tap

>

(Voice Dialer).

The screen displays
“Listening” and the phone
prompts you to say the name
of the command you want to
use. To complete your task,
simply follow the voice
prompts or touch an
onscreen option.
Available ASR commands
include:
䢇 Call  to call an
entry in your Contacts list.
(See “Calling a Contact
With Voice Dialer” on
page 120.)
䢇 Dial  to call a
spoken phone number.
䢇 Redial to redial the last number dialed.

2G. Voice Services

Voice Services

2G. Voice Services

119

SPH-D700.book Page 120 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

䢇

Open  to jump directly to menu items or

applications. (See “Opening Menus With Voice
Dialer” on page 121.)
Tip: Use Voice Dialer in a quiet environment so it can
accurately recognize your commands.

Calling a Contact With Voice Dialer
1. Press

and tap

>

(Voice Dialer).

2. When you see “Listening,” say “Call” followed by
the name and the label for the contact you wish to
call. For example, say “Call John Smith Mobile.” The
device dials the number stored for the contact
“John Smith” with the label “Mobile.”
䡲 If the location is not recognized or the name does
not have a phone number stored in Contacts, you
will see an onscreen list of possible options.

120

2G. Voice Services

䡲

If a name has only a single number, or if you
know the name but are not sure which number to
call, say “Call” followed by the name only. For
example, say “Call John.”
● If the name is recognized and there is only
one phone number for the name, your device
immediately places the call.
● If there are multiple numbers, you will see a
list; tap a number to place the call.

Calling a Phone Number With Voice Dialer
1. Press

and tap

>

(Voice Dialer).

2. When you see “Listening,” say “Call” followed
immediately by a valid string of digits to be dialed,
for example, say “Call 555 555 5555.”
Speak naturally and clearly and remember to speak
one digit at a time—1-800 should be pronounced “One
Eight Zero Zero.”

SPH-D700.book Page 121 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Opening Menus With Voice Dialer

Text-to-Speech

You can jump directly to many menu items or
applications by saying “Go to” followed by a menu
option.

Allows the device to provide a verbal readout of
onscreen data such as messages and incoming caller
information (based on Caller ID).

and tap

“Listening,” say “Open.”
A list of valid actions is
displayed.

3. Tap an option to open
the selected menu.
Tip: You can also say
"Open" and the name of
the item you want to
open. You will see the
item displayed. Tap OK
to open it.

>

(Voice Dialer).

Text-to-Speech Settings
1. Press

>
Text-to-speech.

and tap

>

2. Configure the available options to alter the settings
associated with this feature.
Listen to an example plays a short example of
what the text-to-speech feature will sound like on
your device when activated.
䡲 Install voice data confirms the installation of
necessary data required for voice synthesis. Tap
this to download and install the free app from
Android market.
䡲

Important: Before initial use, activate the Install voice data
function to properly activate and use the
text-to-speech functionality.

2G. Voice Services

Voice Services

1. Press

2. When you see

121

SPH-D700.book Page 122 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Always use my settings overrides any conflicting
application settings with those you set up within
this text-to-speech settings screen. If enabled, and
available as a feature, your device will default to
using the text-to-speech feature.
䡲 Speak incoming CallerID enables the device to
verbally read out incoming Caller ID information
for known and current Contacts.
䡲 Speech rate adjusts the rate at which onscreen
text is spoken by the device. Choose from: Very
slow, Slow, Normal, Fast, and Very fast.
䡲 Language assigns the language used by the
verbal readout. Choose from American English or
Spanish.
䡲

3. Press

to return to the previous screen.

To enable verbal readout of an incoming call:

1. Press

>
Text-to-speech.

and tap

>

2. Tap Speak incoming CallerID (to place a checkmark
on the option). Callers who are already in your
Contacts list will be verbally announced.

122

2G. Voice Services

Voice Search
Voice Search works similarly to the Voice Dialer. It uses
built-in voice recognition software to listen to your
spoken words, convert those to text, and then launch a
Google search using that text.

1. Press

and tap

>

(Voice Search).

2. Speak clearly into the microphone. If an error
occurs, tap Try again.

3. From the onscreen Google search page, tap a
matching entry.

SPH-D700.book Page 123 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

features are dependant on having a memory card
installed. Although the Epic 4G comes with a
16GB card (preinstalled), it can support cards of
up to 32GB.

⽧

Your Device’s microSD Card and Adapter (page 123)

Removing the microSD Card

⽧

Connecting Your Device to Your Computer (page 125)

1. Remove the battery cover.

⽧

microSD Card Settings (page 128)

⽧

Important Connection Information (page 129)

Your Device’s microSD Card and
Adapter
The microSD Card
Your device is equipped with a preinstalled 16GB
SDHC (Secure Digital High Capacity) memory card. It
allows you to store images, videos, music, and voice
data in your device.

microSD Card

Important: Camera, Camcorder, and Music playback

2H. microSD Card

Grasp the device firmly and locate the cover
release latch.
䡲 Place your fingernail in the opening and firmly
“pop” the cover off the device (similar to a soda
can).
䡲

2. Firmly press the card into the slot and release it.
The card should pop partially out of the slot.

3. Remove the card from the slot.
4. Replace the battery cover.
Note: You can easily damage the microSD card and its
adapter by improper operation. Please be careful when
inserting, removing, or handling it.

2H. microSD Card

123

SPH-D700.book Page 124 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Re-inserting the microSD Card
microSD card Slot

1. Remove the battery cover.
Grasp the device firmly and locate the cover
release latch.
䡲 Place your fingernail in the opening and firmly
“pop” the cover off the device (similar to a soda
can).
䡲

Correct
Incorrect

2. Orient the card with the gold strips facing down.
3. Firmly press the card into the slot and make sure
that it catches with the push-click insertion.
Note: Make sure the microSD card's gold contacts are facing
down.

microSD Icon Indicators
WARNING: Do not over-insert the card as this can damage
the contact pins.

Note: Be sure to use only recommended microSD cards
(<32GB). Using non-recommended microSD cards
could cause data loss and damage your device.

The following icons show your microSD card
connection status at a glance:
– card has been unmounted (released from use)
from the device.
– card is being prepared for use and for
mounting.
– card has been removed.

124

2H. microSD Card

SPH-D700.book Page 125 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

device is accessing or transferring files. Doing so
will result in loss or damage of data. Make sure
your battery is fully charged before using the
microSD card. Your data may become damaged
or lost if the battery runs out while you are using
the microSD card.

microSD Adapter
The supplied microSD adapter allows you to use
microSD cards in other SD-compatible devices, like
computers, cameras, and printers. Before using the
microSD card with an SD-compatible device, you will
need to insert the microSD card into the microSD
adapter.
To insert the microSD card into the microSD adapter:
䊳

With the label side of the microSD card facing up,
insert the card into the supplied microSD adapter,
and gently slide the card until it is fully inserted.

To remove the microSD card from the microSD adapter:
䊳

Hold the front edge of the microSD card, and
gently pull it out to remove it from the adapter.

Write Protection
microSD Card

WARNING: DO NOT remove a microSD card while the

The microSD adapter has a built-in Write Protection
lock to prevent accidental overwriting or removal of
your data when the microSD card and adapter are
inserted in another device.
䊳

Slide the Write Protection lock tab down into the
“Lock” position to prevent overwriting of data. To
allow data to be added or removed from the
microSD card, slide the Write Protection lock tab
up into the normal position.

Connecting Your Device to Your
Computer
Before using your device’s mass storage capabilities,
you need to prepare your device’s data services to
synchronize with your desktop or laptop computer.
Once you have connected the device to the computer,
you can transfer your data to or from the microSD card.
Note: If you experience a setup issue, refer to the
“Troubleshooting USB Connection” on page 127.

2H. microSD Card

125

SPH-D700.book Page 126 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Before You Begin
Here is what you will need to have before you can
successfully establish a connection between your Epic
4G and a PC.
䢇 microSD card (internally installed prior to start)
䢇 compatible USB cable (included)

1. With the microSD card installed, connect your
device to your computer using a compatible USB
cable. (Wait for the connection to be completed.
When connected, the host computer will
automatically detect your device.)

2. The USB icon (

) now appears in the top left
Notifications area on your device.

3. Tap Mass Storage from the Select USB mode
screen.
䡲

Charging uses the connected USB cable to

charge the device via your computer’s USB port.
䡲 Mass Storage uses the connected USB cable to
provide data communication between the device
and your computer. The device then appears as
an external drive with its own drive letter.

126

2H. microSD Card

䡲

Tethered Mode allows your computer to obtain an
external data connection by using the device’s
wireless data services and a wired USB
connection. Choose from 3G tethered mode or 4G
tethered mode.
● A wireless data connection can be done by
using the device’s Sprint Hotspot feature
(page 181).

4. Touch and drag down the Status screen to reveal
the Notifications page (or from the Home screen
press
and tap
Notifications).

5. Tap USB connected > Mount to join the card to your
device. This “mounting” allows you to access and
copy files between your computer and your
device's microSD card.
Important: The external microSD card MUST BE MOUNTED
before your computer detects it and you are able
to communicate with it.

6. Locate the newly created drive letter on your
computer. You can now begin to use the microSD
card as a storage device.

SPH-D700.book Page 127 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

䊳

When you have finished transferring data, click the
USB device icon on your computer's taskbar, and
follow the onscreen instructions to safely unplug
the USB cable.

Troubleshooting USB Connection
If there is ever a circumstance where your setup of the
device’s USB connection has an issue, try these
troubleshooting tips.

1. Verify your computer is able to access the Internet
prior to connection and that this connection is not
lost during these troubleshooting procedures.
䡲 Some system connection might require additional
setup data available online.

2. Once the device is connected to the computer via
USB, select Connect to PC to begin the USB
connection setup.
䡲 Selecting the Charge option closes the USB data
connection.
䡲 Verify the device screen shows Connected to PC.

3. From the Found New Hardware Wizard, select Install
the software automatically and click Next.

4. Select a connection to the Internet and click Next.
5. If a Cannot install this Hardware screen appears,
follow these steps:
Click Finish.
䡲 From your Desktop, right-click on the My
Computer icon and select Properties (from the
onscreen context menu).
䡲 Click the Hardware tab and select the Device
Manager.
䡲 Open the ? Other devices section from the list.
Confirm there is a USB MMC Storage item listed.
● This entry indicates an error occurred during
the USB driver installation process.
䡲 Using your mouse, right-click on USB MMC
Storage and select Update Driver....
䡲 From the Found New Hardware Wizard, select
Install the software automatically and click Next >
Finish.
䡲

2H. microSD Card

microSD Card

To remove the connection:

127

SPH-D700.book Page 128 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Transferring data directly to and from the
microSD
You can access the microSD card and use it just as
easily as any other communicating storage device.

1. Connect the USB cable and on the phone screen,
touch Connect to PC.

2. From your Desktop, double-click My Computer >
[device drive letter] entry to display the folders and

2. To complete the disconnect process, touch and
drag the Disconnect slider.

Creating Folders in the microSD Card
1. From your Desktop, double-click My Computer >
[device drive letter].

2. Right-click and select New > Folder.
WARNING: Do not alter or delete the four default folders.
These are used by the phone to parse-out the
different file formats and contents.

files currently available on the internal microSD
card.

3. Open a folder on your computer and begin the
transfer process of files from your computer to the
internal card’s target folder.
Note: This process can be reversed from copying data from
the microSD card back to the connected computer.

To remove the connection:

1. When you have finished transferring data, click the
USB device icon on your computer’s taskbar, and
follow the onscreen instructions to safely unplug
the USB cable.

128

2H. microSD Card

microSD Card Settings
Viewing Memory in the microSD Card
The Epic 4G allows you to review the memory
allocation of both your device’s internal storage and
that of the microSD card.

1. Press

>
and tap
SD card & phone storage.

>

SPH-D700.book Page 129 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

2. Review the available information.

Important: The formatting procedure erases all the data on

The storage capacity page is divided into two
sections: External SD card and Internal phone
storage.

3. Press

the microSD card, after which the files CANNOT
be retrieved. To prevent the loss of important data,
please check the contents before you format the
card.

to return to the previous page.

Formatting the microSD Card

Important Connection Information

Formatting a microSD card permanently removes all
files stored on the card.

䢇

1. Press

>
and tap
SD card & phone storage.

>
䢇

2. Touch Unmount SD card to release the microSD
card from its use by the device. The
icon
appears within the Notifications area to indicate an
unmounted internal microSD card.

䢇

3. Once released, tap Format SD card > Format SD
card > Erase everything.
䡲

Once completely formatted, the card is
automatically re-mounted (reconnected for use by
the device).

䢇

microSD Card

䡲

To avoid loss of data, DO NOT remove the USB
cable, the microSD card, or the battery while
accessing or transferring files.
DO NOT use your computer to change or edit folder
or file names on the microSD card, and do not
attempt to transfer large amounts of data from the
computer to the microSD card. Doing so may cause
the microSD card to fail.
DO NOT turn off or restart your computer, or put it
into standby mode, while using a mass storage
device. Doing so will result in loss or damage of data.
The microSD card can only be mounted for use by
either the device or a connected computer. Prior to
accessing the card via a different method, it must first
be unmounted from its current device (phone or
computer-USB).

2H. microSD Card

129

SPH-D700.book Page 130 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Important: The microSD card can only share a connection
with one device at a time, either your device or
your computer (via its USB connection), not both.
You can not browse the contents of the card via
your device if they are currently being browsed via
your PC.

130

2H. microSD Card

SPH-D700.book Page 131 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

⽧

Taking Pictures (page 131)

⽧

Recording Videos (page 137)
Camera

2I. Camera

Note: The storage card that comes installed on your device
allows you to use the camera and camcorder features.
All pictures and videos are stored on the external 16GB
microSD card. The Epic 4G supports SDHC cards of
up to 32GB.

Taking Pictures
To take a picture:
Taking pictures with your device’s built-in camera is as
simple as choosing a subject, pointing the lens, and
pressing a button.

1. Press and hold the camera key (

) located

on the side of the device.
– or –
>
to activate the
Press
and tap
camera mode. (Additional camera options are
available through the camera settings page. See
“Camera Settings” on page 132 for more
information.)

2I. Camera

131

SPH-D700.book Page 132 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

2. Holding the phone in landscape mode, use the
display screen as a viewfinder and aim the camera
lens at your subject.

3. Press

or tap
until the shutter sounds.
(Your device automatically saves the picture to the
DCIM folder on the microSD card.)

Important: Use the Up and Down Volume buttons to zoom in

Note: Self shot uses the Epic 4G’s front-facing camera lens,
so you can still use the display screen to see what
you're shooting.
䡲

Flash to select a flash setting. Choose from: Auto
flash (default), Off, and On.

Shooting mode

Image settings

Mode

Focus area

Image Viewer

and out on your subject. Up to 4x zoom is
available.

Camera Settings
From camera mode (
), touch the arrow (
the left side panel to display settings options.

) on

Note: Access a menus multiple options by tapping the
onscreen arrows.
䡲

132

Shooting mode to select a mode for shooting
pictures. This determines how many images are
shot and if any effects are applied to them.
● Choose from: Single shot (default), Self shot,
Beauty, Smile shot, Continuous, Panorama,
Vintage, Add me, Action shot and Cartoon.

2I. Camera

Camera settings

SPH-D700.book Page 133 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Exposure value to adjust the overall image

brightness. Use the onscreen slider to adjust the
value.
䡲 Settings to access the camera options and
settings:
● Camera: to configure the camera hardware
parameters (page 133).
● Settings: provides additional image shooting
options.
䡲 Focus area to force the camera to focus on a
specific area on the display, even if it's not in the
center of the frame. This is useful of you want to
make sure that even though an object isn’t in the
center of the shot it will still be in focus.
䡲 Mode to toggle between the camera and
camcorder modes.
䡲 Shoot to take the picture. Press
or tap
to capture the shot.
䡲 Image Viewer to review the saved pictures. Tap the
arrows to view additional pictures.
● Additional features in the viewer include
Share, Set as, Delete and magnify.

Camera Options and Settings
Tap the settings icon
to access the options and
settings screens where there are two available tabs.
䊳

Tap OK to exit from a menu and return to the
Settings tab.
– or –

䢇

Tap a setting option to reveal an onscreen
description.
Camera
for general camera settings:

Camera

䡲

䡲

Outdoor visibility to adjust the display screen for

䡲

Focus mode to set the focal properties of the
camera lens. Choose from Auto focus (default),
Macro (close up images), or Face detection (focus

better viewing outdoors.

䡲

is on people’s faces in front of the camera).
Scene mode to select a camera setting for better
image capture under different lighting
environments. Choose from: None (default),
Portrait, Landscape, Night, Sports, Party/Indoor,
Beach/Snow, Sunset, Dawn, Fall colour, Firework,
Text, Candlelight and Backlight.

2I. Camera

133

SPH-D700.book Page 134 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

䡲

Timer to set a time delay before the camera

remotely takes a picture (self-timer). Once a time
is selected, and you click the shoot button, you
will hear and see a countdown before the image
is taken. Choose from: Off, 2 sec, 5 sec, or 10 sec.
䡲 Resolution to set the image resolution. Choose
from: 5M (2560x1920), W4M (2560x1536
widescreen), 3.2M (2048x1536), W2.4M
(2048x1232 widescreen), 2M (1600x1200), W1.5M
(1600x960 widescreen), 0.3M (640x480), or
W0.4M (800x480 widescreen).
䡲 White balance to compensate for color differences
found within different lighting conditions. Choose
from: Auto (default), Daylight, Cloudy,
Incandescent, or Fluorescent.
䡲 Effects to apply different color effects onto
images. Choose from: Normal (default), Negative,
Black and White or Sepia.
䡲 ISO to assign a shutter speed. Choose from:
Auto (default) , 100, 200, 400, or 800.
䡲 Metering to determine the way in which the
camera determines the exposure. Choose from:
Centre-weighted (default), Spot, or Matrix.

134

2I. Camera

䡲

䢇

Anti-Shake to help prevent blurriness due to

normal movements and shaking while taking the
picture.
䡲 Auto contrast to provide clear images even under
backlight conditions where the light can vary the
image.
䡲 Blink detection to warn you of possible subject
blinking before you shoot an image.
䡲 Image quality to set the image quality for your
image. Choose from: Superfine (default), Fine, or
Normal.
䡲 Adjust to manually adjust image contract, color
saturation levels, and sharpness.
Settings
for additional image settings:
䡲

Guidelines to view image guidelines on your

䡲

Review to display the recently shot image for
review. Choose from: Off, 2 sec, or On.

䡲

GPS to record GPS information into the image file.

䡲

Shutter sound to assign a sound when the image
is taken. Choose from: Sound 1 (default), Sound 2,
Sound 3, or Off.

screen as you take a picture.

SPH-D700.book Page 135 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Reset to reconfigure your camera settings back to
their defaults.

More (Details, Set as, Crop, Rotate left, or
Rotate Right).

View Your Pictures

●

Tap an image to open it, and press
for
options such as Share (Facebook, Email,
Picasa, AllShare, Messaging, Bluetooth, or
Gmail), Delete, and More (Details, Set as, Crop,
Rotate left, or Rotate Right).

●

Press

The Gallery is where you can
access the Gallery of stored
camera images.

1. Press
tap

and
>

.

2. Select a folder location
(ex: Camera) and tap an
image to view your picture.
● Pressing
from
the main Gallery
screen reveals galleryspecific options Share,
Delete, and More.
● From the image folder, touch and hold any
desired images to select them (indicated by a
green checkmark) and press
for
options such as Share (Picasa, Bluetooth,
Gmail, Email, and Messaging), Delete, and

to return to the previous screen.

Camera Image Settings
1. Press

and tap

>

Camera

䡲

.

2. From Camera gallery, tap an image icon to open
the image.
Use the zoom buttons (upper-right of the image)
to zoom in or out.

䡲

Note: Picture options can also be accessed by touching
and holding the image from the gallery. These options
include: Share, Delete, and More.

Note: Tap an onscreen image to display the available options
(Zoom, Slideshow, or Menu).

2I. Camera

135

SPH-D700.book Page 136 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

3. Tap Slideshow to initiate an onscreen slideshow
displaying every image in the current folder.
– or –
Tap Menu to display the following image menu
options:

136

2I. Camera

䡲

Share to activate the picture share menu from

which you can choose to share the current image
via one of many options:
● Facebook to insert your image into your
Facebook page.
● Email to attach your image to a new email
message.
● Picasa to upload your image to your Picasa
account. Tap Upload to complete the process.
● AllShare to use the AllShare application to
share your image with other communicating
devices (page 209).
● Messaging to insert your image into a new
outgoing MMS message (multimedia text
message).
● Bluetooth to send the image to another device
via Bluetooth.
● Gmail to attach your image to a new Gmail
email message.
䡲 Delete to delete the image.

SPH-D700.book Page 137 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

More to open additional image options such as:
Details, Set as, Crop, Rotate Left, and Rotate Right.
●

●

●

●

Details to display image details such as Title,

Type, Date taken, Album, Location, Latitude,
and Longitude.
Set as to assign the image as either the
Wallpaper (Home screen background) or to a
current Contact icon (display image).
Crop to crop the image. Crop the image and
tap Save to a new version of the original.
Rotate to rotate the image. Options include:
Rotate left or Rotate right.

Assigning Pictures
After taking a picture, assign it as a picture ID for a
Contacts entry or as the Home screen background
image (wallpaper).

1. Press

and tap

>

.

2. From the Camera gallery (or other image folder),
tap an image icon to open the image.

3. With the picture displayed, tap Menu > More > Set
as, and select an option.
Wallpaper to assign the picture as a background
image. Crop the image by dragging the orange
border box and tap Save to assign the picture.
䡲 Contact icon to assign the picture to a Contacts
entry as a picture ID. Tap an entry from the
Contacts tab, crop the image by dragging the
orange border box and tap Save to assign the
picture.
䡲

Camera

䡲

Recording Videos
In addition to taking pictures, you can record, view, and
send videos with your device’s built-in video camera.

1. Press and hold the camera key (

) located

on the side of the device.
– or –
Press
and tap
camera mode.

>

to activate

2I. Camera

137

SPH-D700.book Page 138 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Important: Use the Up and Down Volume buttons to zoom in
and out on your subject. Up to 4x zoom is
available.

2. Tap

Recording mode

Video settings

Mode

Focus area

Video Viewer

in the upper right corner to activate

camcorder mode (

).

3. Holding the phone in landscape mode, use the
display screen as a viewfinder and aim the camera
lens at your subject.

4. Select a recording mode:
䡲

Normal: the file size limit is determined by the

available storage space remaining in your SDHC
storage card.
䡲 Limit for MMS: the file size is limited by the
restriction placed on video files that can be
attached to MMS text messages. Depending on
your settings, this can be up to 50 seconds.

5. Press
6. Press

or tap

to begin recording.

or tap
to stop recording. (Your
device automatically saves the video within the
DCIM folder on the microSD card.)

138

2I. Camera

Camcorder settings

Camcorder Settings
From camcorder mode (
), touch the arrow (
on the left side panel to display settings options.
Note: Access a menus multiple options by tapping the
onscreen arrows.

)

SPH-D700.book Page 139 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Camcorder Options and Settings
Tap the settings icon
to access the options and
settings screens where there are two available tabs.
䊳

Tap OK to exit from a menu and return to the
Settings tab.
– or –

䢇

Tap a setting option to reveal an onscreen
description.
Camcorder
for general camera settings:
䡲

Outdoor visibility to adjust the display screen for

䡲

Timer to set a time delay before the camcorder

Camera

Recording mode to set the image quality for your
image. Choose from: Normal (for SDHC card
storage) or Limit for MMS (sending the video in an
MMS/video message).
䡲 Flash set the flash on or off.
䡲 Exposure value to adjust the overall image
brightness. Use the onscreen slider to adjust the
value.
䡲 Settings to access the camera options and
settings:
● Camcorder: to configure the camera hardware
parameters (page 139).
● Settings: provides additional image shooting
options.
䡲 Mode to toggle between the camcorder and
camera modes.
䡲 Shoot touch to begin shooting the video.
䡲 Video Viewer to review the saved videos. Tap the
onscreen arrows to view additional videos.
● Additional features in the viewer include
Share, Play, or Delete.
䡲

better viewing outdoors.
remotely shoots a video (self-timer). Once a time
is selected, and you click the shoot button, you
will hear and see a countdown before the video is
shot. Choose from: Off, 2 sec, 5 sec, or 10 sec.
䡲 Resolution to set the video resolution. Choose
from: 1280x720, 720x480, 640x480, 320x240, or
176x144.

2I. Camera

139

SPH-D700.book Page 140 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

White balance to compensate for color differences
found within different lighting conditions. Choose
from: Auto (default), Daylight, Cloudy,
Incandescent, or Fluorescent.
䡲 Effects to apply different color effects onto videos.
Choose from: Normal (default), Negative, Black
and White or Sepia.
䡲 Video quality to set the quality for your video.
Choose from: Superfine (default), Fine, or Normal.
䡲 Adjust to manually adjust video contrast, color
saturation levels, and sharpness.
Settings
for additional video settings:
䡲 Guidelines enable to view guidelines on your
screen as you shoot the video.
䡲 Audio recording enable the recording of audio
within your video. Remove the checkmark to turn
off this feature and record only video.
䡲 Review enable the display the recently shot image
for review.
䡲 Reset reconfigures your camcorder settings back
to their default parameters.
䡲

䢇

140

2I. Camera

Video Settings
1. Press

and tap

>

.

2. From Camera gallery, tap a video icon to begin
video playback.
– or –
Touch and hold the video icon to select the video
and display the following video menu context
menu options:

䡲

Select all to place a checkmark on all files within
the current folder.

SPH-D700.book Page 141 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Unselect all to remove checkmarks on all files

within the current folder.
䡲 Share to share the selected video via one of many
options:
● YouTube to upload your selected video file to a
YouTube page. Tap Upload to complete the
process.
● Messaging to attach your video to a new MMS
message.
● AllShare to utilize the AllShare application to
share your video with other communicating
devices.
● Bluetooth to send your selected videos to an
external Bluetooth-compatible device.
● Email to attach your video to a new email
message.
● Gmail to attach your video to a new Gmail
email message.
䡲 Delete to delete the current video.
䡲 More to open additional video options such as:

●

Details to display video details such as Title,
Type, Date taken, Album, Location, Latitude,
and Longitude.

Camera

䡲

2I. Camera

141

SPH-D700.book Page 142 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Turning Bluetooth On and Off

2J. Bluetooth
⽧

Turning Bluetooth On and Off (page 142)

⽧

Using the Bluetooth Settings Menu (page 143)

⽧

Pairing Bluetooth Devices (page 144)

⽧

Sending Contacts via Bluetooth (page 146)

⽧

Disconnecting Bluetooth Connection During an Active
Call (page 147)

About Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a short-range communications technology
that allows you to connect wirelessly to a number of
Bluetooth devices, such as headsets and hands-free
car kits, and Bluetooth-enabled handhelds, computers,
printers, and wireless devices. The Bluetooth
communication range is usually up to approximately
30 feet.

By default, your device’s Bluetooth feature is set to Off.
Turning Bluetooth on activates the internal Bluetooth
antenna.
Note: Activating Bluetooth can drain your battery faster and
reduce your available usage times. It is recommended
that if you do not need it active, turn it off.
It is also recommended to turn off your Bluetooth within
locations that prohibit its use.

To turn Bluetooth on:

1. Press

>
and tap
Wireless & networks.

2. Tap Bluetooth to activate it (a green checkmark
indicates it is active). When active,
within the Status area.

2J. Bluetooth

appears

To turn Bluetooth off:
䊳

Press

>
and tap
Wireless & networks > Bluetooth.
䡲

142

>

>

Tap to remove the green checkmark and
deactivate Bluetooth.

SPH-D700.book Page 143 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Bluetooth Status Indicators
The following icons show your Bluetooth connection
status at a glance:
– Bluetooth is active
– Bluetooth is connected (paired) and
communicating
[no icon] – Bluetooth is disabled (default status)

To access the Bluetooth Settings menu:

1. Press

>
and tap
>
Wireless & networks > Bluetooth settings.

2. Set your Bluetooth options: Device name, Visible,
and Scan devices.

Bluetooth Active

Using the Bluetooth Settings Menu
Bluetooth Settings

Bluetooth

The Bluetooth settings menu allows you to set up many
of the characteristics of your device’s Bluetooth service,
including:
䢇 Entering or changing the name your device uses for
Bluetooth communication and description
䢇 Setting your device’s visibility (or “discoverability”) for
other Bluetooth devices
䢇 Displaying your device’s Bluetooth address

Bluetooth Stereo
Headset
Bluetooth Phone
Bluetooth Computer

2J. Bluetooth

143

SPH-D700.book Page 144 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

To change your Bluetooth name:

Pairing Bluetooth Devices

1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.
2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap Device name.

Paired Devices

3. Tap the Device name field and enter a new name.

The Bluetooth pairing process allows you to establish
trusted connections between your device and another
Bluetooth device. When you pair devices, they share a
passkey, allowing for fast, secure connections while
bypassing the discovery and authentication process.

4. Tap OK to complete the rename process.
To make your device visible:

1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.
2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap Visible.
䡲

Making your device visible allows it to be
detected by other devices for pairing and
communication.

Note: Your device is visible for up to 120 seconds
(2 minutes). This value appears as a countdown within
this field.

To scan for Bluetooth devices:

144

To pair your device with another Bluetooth device:

1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.
2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap Visible. Your
device must be visible to successfully pair with an
external device.

3. Tap Scan devices. (Your device will display a list of
discovered in-range Bluetooth devices.

4. Tap a device from the list to initiate pairing.

1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.

5. Enter the passkey or PIN code and tap OK.

2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap Scan devices

6. The external device will then have to also accept

to search for visible external Bluetooth-compatible
devices such as headsets, devices, printers, and
computers.

the connection and enter your device’s PIN code.

2J. Bluetooth

SPH-D700.book Page 145 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Once successfully paired to an external device,
appears within the Status area.

Note: Due to different specifications and features of other
Bluetooth-compatible devices, display and operations
may be different, and functions such as transfer or
exchange may not be possible with all Bluetoothcompatible devices.

Note: Pairing between two Bluetooth devices is a one-time
process. Once a pairing has been created, the devices
will continue to recognize their partnership and
exchange information without having to re-enter a
passcode again.

To disconnect a paired device:
Disconnecting a paired device breaks the connection
between the device and your Epic 4G, but retains the
knowledge of the pairing. At a later point when you
wish to reconnect the device, there is no need to setup
the connection information again.

1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.
2. From the Bluetooth settings page, touch the

3. Tap OK to confirm disconnection.
– or –
From the Bluetooth settings page, touch and hold
the name of the previously paired device, and
select Disconnect.
Note: Disconnections are manually done but often occur
automatically if the paired device goes out of range of
your Epic 4G or it is powered off.

To delete a paired device (unpair):
Deleting a device from your list removes its “connection
record” and upon reconnection would require that you
re-enter all the previous pairing information.

1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.
2. From the Bluetooth settings page, touch and hold
the name of the previously paired device (from the
bottom of the page). This opens the connected
device’s menu options.

Bluetooth

䡲

3. Tap Disconnect or Disconnect & unpair to confirm
deletion.

previously paired device (from the bottom of the
page).

2J. Bluetooth

145

SPH-D700.book Page 146 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

To access a paired device’s settings:

1. Press

1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.

tap

2. From the Bluetooth settings page, touch and hold
the name of the previously paired device.

3. Tap Options and configure the desired options.
4. Press

to return to the previous page.

Sending Contacts via Bluetooth

2. Touch an entry to open
its overview page.

3. Press

Note: Prior to using this feature, Bluetooth must first be
enabled, and the recipient’s device must be visible.
In addition to Contact’s information, other file types
(video, image, or audio) can be sent using Bluetooth.

Note: If no devices are detected, tap Scan devices to begin a
new search.

146

2J. Bluetooth

and tap

Send namecard via >
Bluetooth.

4. Tap a paired device.
䡲

Depending on your paired devices’ settings and
capabilities, you may be able to send pictures,
Contacts information, or other items using a Bluetooth
connection.

and

.

The external Bluetooth
device must be visible
and communicating for
the pairing to be
successful.

See “Sending Contacts” on
page 101.

SPH-D700.book Page 147 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Disconnecting Bluetooth
Connection During an Active Call
During an active call, where the audio is being
routed through a connected Bluetooth device
(headset or hands-free connection), tap Bluetooth
to route the device’s audio through the connected
Bluetooth headset (On) or through the speaker
(Off).
䡲 When the call is routed to a Bluetooth headset,
the current call area is surrounded by a blue box,
the Bluetooth button indicates it’s on, and shows
the Bluetooth call icon (
).
䡲 When turned off, the call is routed through either
the earpiece or speaker, the call area is
surrounded by a green box, the Bluetooth button
indicates its off, and shows (
).

Bluetooth

䊳

Note: Communication can be toggled between the Bluetooth
headset and the device speaker by tapping the
Headset button On or Off.

2J. Bluetooth

147

SPH-D700.book Page 148 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

SPH-D700.book Page 149 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Section 3

Sprint Service

SPH-D700.book Page 150 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

3A. Sprint Service:
The Basics
⽧

Visual Voicemail (page 150)

⽧

Text Messaging (SMS) (page 156)

⽧

Multimedia Messaging (MMS) (page 158)

⽧

Caller ID (page 162)

⽧

Call Waiting (page 162)

⽧

Making a 3-Way Call (page 163)

⽧

Call Forwarding (page 164)

⽧

Roaming (page 164)

Visual Voicemail
Visual Voicemail gives you a quick and easy way to
access your voicemail. Now you can find exactly the
message you are looking for without having to listen to
every voicemail message first. This new feature
periodically goes out to your voicemail, and gathers the
caller information from all of the current voicemails.

150

3A. Sprint Service: The Basics

It then populates a list with the caller name and
number, along with the length of time and priority level
of the voicemail message.

Setting Up Your Visual Voicemail
Your device automatically transfers all unanswered
calls to your voicemail, even if your device is in use or
turned off. You should set up your Sprint voicemail and
personal greeting as soon as your device is activated.
Note: To set up your traditional voicemail box, see“Setting Up
Your Voicemail” on page 5.

1. Press

and tap

.

2. Tap Personalize now and follow the system
prompts to:
Create a password (part of standard voicemail).
䡲 Record your name announcement.
䡲 Record your greeting.
䡲

3. When prompted to enter information, tap Dialpad to
bring up the onscreen dialpad to enter your
numeric responses.

SPH-D700.book Page 151 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Sprint strongly recommends that you create a
password when setting up your voicemail to protect
against unauthorized access. Without a password,
anyone who has access to your device is able to
access your voicemail messages.

4. Once you have
completed the setup
process, return to the
voicemail page (see
step 1).

5. Tap the Welcome to
Voicemail message on
the screen to play a brief
explanation of the
voicemail services.

The following is a description
of the features available while
reviewing a voicemail
message.
Note: Press

> Lock to prevent the message from
accidentally being deleted.

Timeline provides a visual timeline for the current
message. Touch and drag this bar to scrub
through the message to different points.
● Tap
to pause the playback, tap
to resume.
䡲 Call to call the person who left the voicemail
message.
䡲 Reply to reply to the message. You can then reply
to the sender or forward it to anyone with either
an email or phone number. This allows you to
send this voicemail message to several recipients
at the same time. You can tag the reply message
for both Urgency and Privacy.
● Tap Send to deliver the new message.
䡲 Speaker Off/On to turn the speakerphone on or off
during playback. If the speakerphone feature was
enabled within the Voicemail Settings menu, the
speakerphone will always be automatically
enabled during voicemail playback (page 153).
䡲 Delete to delete the current voicemail message.
Tap OK to confirm the deletion.
䡲

3A. Sprint Service: The Basics

151

Sprint Service

Note: Voicemail Password

SPH-D700.book Page 152 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Listening to Multiple Voicemail Messages
When you are done listening to a voicemail message
you can easily access other voicemail messages
without returning to the main voicemail screen.

1. Listen to the current voicemail message.
2. Swipe your finger left or right to display the next or
previous message. (It will begin playing
automatically.)
You can navigate through voicemail messages as
frequently as you'd like. You can even move to the next
or previous message before you're finished listening to
the current one.

Configuring Voicemail Options
To access the voicemail menu options:

1. Press

and tap

.

2. Press

and select from the following:
䡲 Compose to compose a new voicemail message.
䡲 Play all new to listen to all new messages.
䡲 Undelivered to list all undelivered voicemail
messages.

152

3A. Sprint Service: The Basics

Delete to delete selected messages from your
current list of available voicemail messages.
䡲 Search to search through voicemail messages for
keywords.
䡲 Settings to configure your voicemail application
settings.
䡲

To access a voicemail message’s options:

1. Press

and tap

.

2. Tap a voicemail message and press

and
select from the following:
䡲 Lock/Unlock to prevent deletion of the selected
voicemail message.
䡲 Text message to create and deliver a new text
message to the sender’s phone number.
䡲 Reply to reply to the voicemail. You can then reply
to the sender or forward it to anyone with either
an email or phone number. This allows you to
send this voicemail message to several recipients
at the same time.
䡲 Forward to forward the voicemail to another
recipient.

SPH-D700.book Page 153 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Add to contacts to add the sender’s phone
number to your Contacts list.

Configuring Voicemail Settings
1. Press

and tap

2. Press

and tap Settings. From this menu, you

.

can:
䡲 Tap Notifications to determine how you are
notified of new voicemails. Choose from:
Notifications, Select ringtone, and Vibrate.
䡲 Tap Pictures to replace the default Visual
Voicemail message icon with a specific Contacts
entry’s image. This image is pulled from the
entry’s Contacts details page (page 98).
䡲 Tap Speakerphone to automatically activate the
speakerphone when you review your Visual
Voicemail (page 153).
䡲 Tap Change greeting to adjust your voicemail
greeting (page 154).
䡲 Tap From name to enter a name or number that is
attached to your outgoing voicemails as part of
an identification string (page 154).

Tap Check for upgrade to search for an upgrade
to your Visual message software.
䡲 Tap About Voicemail to view build information
about the current visual voicemail application.
䡲

Note: Voicemail settings can also be accessed by pressing
>
and tapping Settings > Call settings >
Voicemail settings.

Automatically Enabling the Speakerphone
Every time you access a selected message from your
Visual Voicemail list, you can configure the device to
automatically launch the built-in speakerphone so that
you can clearly hear the message.

1. Press

and tap

2. Press

and tap Settings to make your

.

alterations.
Tap Speakerphone to activate the feature. You will
see a green checkmark on the right.
䡲 Tap Speakerphone again to deactivate the
speakerphone. The checkmark will be grayed out.
䡲

3A. Sprint Service: The Basics

Sprint Service

䡲

153

SPH-D700.book Page 154 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Changing Your Main Greeting via the
Voicemail Menu

3. Tap the existing identification field and enter a new

Your main greeting can be changed directly via the
Visual Voicemail system. This direct access saves you
from having to navigate within the voicemail menu.

4. Tap OK to save your information.

1. Press

and tap

2. Press

and tap Settings > Change greeting.

.

3. Tap OK to connect to the Sprint voicemail system
and follow the prompts to change your current
greeting.

Editing the From Name via the Voicemail
Menu
From your Visual Voicemail menu, you can quickly
change the name or number attached to your voice
messages.

154

1. Press

and tap

2. Press

and tap Settings > From name.

.

3A. Sprint Service: The Basics

identifying name or number (used to identify you
to recipients of your voice messages).

Voicemail Notification
There are several ways your device alerts you to a new
message:
䢇 By sounding the assigned ringer type.
䢇 By displaying
within the Notifications area of
the Status bar when a single new unheard voicemail
message is received.
䢇

By displaying 3 within the Notifications area of
the Status bar when multiple new unheard voicemail
messages have been received.

SPH-D700.book Page 155 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Network, you may not receive notification of new
voicemail messages. Sprint recommends that you
periodically check your voicemail by dialing 1 + area
code + your wireless phone number. When your
voicemail answers, tap
and enter your password.
Roaming rates apply when you access voicemail while
roaming off the Nationwide Sprint Network.
Your device accepts messages even when it is turned
off. However, your device notifies you of new messages
only when it is turned on and you are in a Sprint service
area.

Retrieving Your Voicemail Messages
You can review your messages directly from your
wireless device (using either traditional voicemail or
Visual Voicemail) or from any other touch-tone phone.
To dial from your wireless device, either speed dial your
voicemail or use the menu keys.

Using Traditional Voicemail to Access Your
Messages
1. Press

and tap

.

2. Touch and hold

. If prompted, enter your

voicemail password.

Using Visual Voicemail to Access Your Messages
1. Press

and tap

.

2. Tap an entry to listen to the message.
Note: You are charged for airtime minutes when you are
accessing your voicemail from your wireless device.

Using Another Phone to Access Messages
1. Dial your wireless phone number.
2. When your voicemail answers, tap

.

3. Enter your password.

Using Visual Voicemail to Delete Your Messages
1. Press

and tap

.

2. Touch and hold a voicemail entry from the list and
tap Delete this message > OK.
– or –
Open a message and tap

> OK to delete it.

3A. Sprint Service: The Basics

Sprint Service

Note: When you are roaming off the Nationwide Sprint

155

SPH-D700.book Page 156 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Text Messaging (SMS)

1. Press

>

and tap

(Notifications).

– or –
With text messaging (SMS), you can send and receive
instant text messages between your wireless device
and another messaging-ready phone. When you
receive a new message, it will automatically display on
your device’s screen.
Messaging is available via the Messaging application
in your Applications screen. This icon (
) appears
in Status bar area when a new text message is
received.
Note: See your service plan for applicable charges for text
messaging and SMS voice messaging.

Viewing Notifications of Received Messages
When you receive a message, your device notifies you
by displaying an icon within the Notification area at the
top left of your Home screen.
䡲
indicates a new text or MMS messages
were received.

156

3A. Sprint Service: The Basics

Touch and hold the Status bar, then slide your
finger down the screen. (See “Using the
Notifications Panel” on page 40.)

2. Tap a message entry to open the Messaging
application.

Composing Text Messages
1. Press

and tap

> New message.

2. Tap the To field and enter a Contacts name, a
mobile phone number, or an email address using
either the onscreen or QWERTY keyboards.
Note: If you are using an onscreen keyboard, you can switch
between the default Swype to Android keyboard text
entry method. Touch and hold either the To or the Type
to compose field, tap Input method, and select your
preferred method.
䡲

Contacts as you enter either a phone number or
email address, if the information matches a
current contact’s entry information, you will see a
match. When you see a match, touch the
associated name to complete the addressing.

SPH-D700.book Page 157 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Mobile to enter a wireless phone number directly.

䡲

Email to enter the recipient’s email address.

3. If applicable, tap a matching entry from the
onscreen drop-down list. This list is populated by
matches found from your managed accounts.

4. Touch the Type to compose field and enter your
message. (For information on entering text and
special characters such as emoticons [smileys],
see “Entering Text Using the Android Keyboard” on
page 41, “Entering Text Using Swype” on page 45,
or “Entering Text Using the QWERTY Keyboard” on
page 51.)

5. Review your message and tap Send.

Accessing Text Messages
To read a text message:
䊳

When you receive a text message, you will see it
listed within the Messaging screen. Touch the
message to open the message and then scroll
down and view its entire content.

To reply to a text message:

1. While the message is open, tap the Type to
compose field and then type your reply message.

2. Compose your reply or use the preset messages
or icons.
To type a message, use an onscreen keyboard or
the QWERTY keyboard. (For information on
entering text and special characters such as
emoticons [smileys], see Entering Text Using the
Android Keyboard, “Entering Text Using Swype”
on page 45, or “Entering Text Using the QWERTY
Keyboard” on page 51.)

䡲

3. Review your reply and tap Send.
– or –
You may select additional messaging options by
pressing
, and then tapping Send.
䡲 Options may include: Call, View contact, Add
subject, Attach, Send, or More (Insert Smiley, Delete
thread, All threads, and Add to Contacts).

3A. Sprint Service: The Basics

Sprint Service

䡲

157

SPH-D700.book Page 158 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Multimedia Messaging (MMS)
With multimedia messaging (MMS), you can send and
receive instant text messages that contain text, pictures,
audio, recorded voice, or a picture slideshow.
Messaging is available via the Messaging application
in your Applications screen.
Note: See your service plan for applicable charges for text
messaging and MMS voice messaging.

Composing MMS Messages
Composing MMS messages is exactly the same as
composing text messages, except that you attach a
picture, a video, or an audio file to the message.

1. Press

and tap

> New message.

Note: From the Messages screen, you can also touch New
message to begin creating a new outgoing message.

158

3A. Sprint Service: The Basics

2. Tap the To: field and enter a Contact's name, a
mobile phone number, or an email address. As
you enter text and numbers, matching contacts
appear onscreen.
䡲 If applicable, tap an available matching recipient
or continue entering the phone number or email
address.

3. Touch the Type to compose field and enter your
message.

4. Press

and tap Attach.

5. Select a multimedia attachment type:
Pictures: Opens the Gallery application. Use the
onscreen navigation to select the picture you wish
to send with the outgoing message.
䡲 Capture picture: Opens the camera application.
Take a picture, and then tap Save to use this
image in your message. (See “Taking Pictures” on
page 131.)
䡲 Videos: Opens the Gallery application. Use the
onscreen navigation to select a video and attach
it to your outgoing message.
䡲

SPH-D700.book Page 159 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Volume Meter

Controls
䡲

Recording duration

Record Play

Stop

Slideshow: Opens the Edit slideshow menu.
●

●

●

Touch Add slide to create a new slide (this is a
placeholder for new images to be added,
similar to a playlist).
Touch the created slide (example, Slide 1), tap
Add picture, and then select the picture you
want to add to the slide.
Tap the text field below the image to enter a
caption for the picture.

3A. Sprint Service: The Basics

Sprint Service

Capture video: Opens the camcorder application.
Shoot a video, and then tap Save to use this video
in your message. (See “Recording Videos” on
page 137.)
䡲 Audio: Opens the Select audio menu. Use the
onscreen navigation to select an audio file and
tap OK.
䡲 Record audio: Opens the message recorder
(shown below).
● Record Duration: length of the recorded voice
message.
● Volume Meter: displays the volume level.
● Record: starts recording your message.
● Play: plays back the recording.
● Stop: stops the recording. Once stopped, tap
either Use this recording (attach it to your
message), or Discard (delete the current
recording and re-record).
䡲

159

SPH-D700.book Page 160 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Current Image

Image Navigation

To view and play a multimedia message:

1. Press

and tap

.

2. From the message list, tap a multimedia message
to open its contents.

3. While the message is open, tap the play icon (on a
video or audio file) to play back the file or tap an
image to view a picture.
Tip: The file attachment on the MMS message can be saved
to the microSD card. To save the attachment, touch and
hold the file and tap Copy attached to SD card from the
Message options context menu.

Caption Field
●

Slideshow Controls

When finished, tap
to attach the
slideshow to your message.

Note: To remove or replace a picture or an audio attachment,
on the Compose screen, tap the Remove button next
to the attachment.

6. When you are finished creating your new MMS
message, touch Send.

160

3A. Sprint Service: The Basics

To reply to a multimedia message:

1. Press

and tap

.

2. From the message list, tap a multimedia message
to open its contents.

3. While the message is open, tap the Type to
compose field and then type your reply message.

4. Once complete, tap Send.

SPH-D700.book Page 161 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

message, first open the text message, press
and
tap Add subject or Attach. The original text message is
then automatically converted into a multimedia
message.

Deleting a Message or Message Thread
1. Press

and tap

.

2. Touch and hold the message entry to display the
context menu.

3. Tap Delete thread and once prompted, tap Delete
to complete the process. (From within a message,
you may need to tap More to display the Delete
thread option.)
䡲 Tap Delete locked messages to place a green
checkmark and also include those messages that
have been locked.

Adjusting Message Settings
1. Press

and tap

.

2. From within the Messaging screen, press
and tap Settings.

3. Adjust the following fields according to your needs:
Delete old messages: Enable this option to delete
older text messages that exceed the defined
maximum number of text messages limit set
below.
䡲 Text message limit: Sets the maximum number of
text messages that can be stored on the device
(per conversation).
䡲 Multimedia message limit: Sets the maximum
number of multimedia messages that can be
stored on the device (per conversation).
䡲 Auto-retrieve: Enable this option to automatically
retrieve the entire content of your MMS message.
When checked, the MMS message header,
message body, and any attachments will
automatically download to your device.
● If you disable this option, only the MMS
message header will be retrieved and shown
in the message list.
䡲 Roaming auto-retrieve: Disable this option if you
only desire the MMS message headers to
download while roaming. Enable this option to
automatically download your complete
multimedia messages even while roaming.
䡲

3A. Sprint Service: The Basics

Sprint Service

Note: When replying to a text message with an MMS

161

SPH-D700.book Page 162 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

䡲

Notifications: Enable this option if you wish to

receive a notification in the status bar when a new
text or multimedia message arrives.
䡲 Select ringtone: Allows you to select a ringer to
sound when a new message is received. Tap this
option, and then select a ring tone that is specific
to new text and multimedia messages. A sample
will briefly be played upon selection.
䡲 Vibrate: Enable this option if you want the device
to vibrate when a new text or multimedia
message is received.

Caller ID
Caller ID allows people to identify a caller before
answering the phone by displaying the number of the
incoming call. If you do not want your number
displayed when you make a call, follow these steps.

1. Press

and tap
onscreen dialer.

2. Tap

PQRS

>

Keypad

to access the

.

3. Enter a phone number and then press

.

To permanently block your number, call Sprint
Customer Service.

Call Waiting
When you’re on a call, Call
Waiting alerts you to
incoming calls by sounding
two beeps. Your device’s
screen informs you that
another call is coming in
and displays the caller’s
phone number (if it is
available and you are in
digital mode).

New Incoming Call

To respond to an incoming
call while you’re on a call:
䊳

Before accepting the
incoming call, drag the
onscreen caller to one
of the following
onscreen options:
Holding Call
Call Options

162

3A. Sprint Service: The Basics

SPH-D700.book Page 163 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Answer to answer the new call. The first caller is

placed on hold.
䡲 Ignore to send the call to your voicemail box.
䡲 Ignore with text to send the call to your voicemail
box and immediately send the caller a text
message. These Ignore messages can be
created and stored on the device.
To switch back to the first caller:
䊳

From the In-Call options screen (shown here), tap
Swap.

Tip: For those calls where you don’t want to be interrupted,
you can temporarily disable Call Waiting by pressing
PQRS
before placing your call. Call Waiting is
automatically reactivated once you end the call.

Making a 3-Way Call
With 3-Way calling, you can talk to two people at the
same time. When using this feature, the normal airtime
rates will be charged for each of the two calls.

1. Press

and tap
onscreen dialer.

>

Keypad

to access the

2. Make your call to the first
recipient.

3. Once you have established
the connection, tap
Add call (
).
Add call

䡲

It may take up to 20
seconds for the button to
turn gray.

4. Enter the second caller’s
phone number and tap
or select a number
from your Contacts
(
). (Your first call is
automatically put on hold.)
Contacts

5. When you’re connected to the second party,
tap Merge to combine both calls into a single
3-way call.

3A. Sprint Service: The Basics

Sprint Service

䡲

163

SPH-D700.book Page 164 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

If one of the people you called hangs up during your
call, you and the remaining caller stay connected. If you
initiated the call and are the first to hang up, all callers
are disconnected.

To deactivate Call Forwarding:

1. Press

and tap
onscreen dialer.

>

Keypad

to access the

2. Tap

PQRS
. (You will
see a message and hear a tone to confirm the
deactivation.)

Call Forwarding
Call Forwarding lets you forward all your incoming calls
to another phone number – even when your device is
turned off. You can continue to make calls from your
phone when you have activated Call Forwarding.

Note: You are charged a higher rate for calls you have
forwarded.

Roaming

To activate Call Forwarding:

1. Press

and tap
onscreen dialer.

2. Tap

PQRS

>

Keypad

to access the

.

3. Enter the area code and phone number to which
you want your calls forwarded.

4. Tap

. (You will see a message and hear a
tone to confirm the activation of Call Forwarding.)

164

3A. Sprint Service: The Basics

Roaming Icon
Your display screen always lets you know when you’re
off the Nationwide Sprint Network. Anytime you are
roaming, the phone displays the roaming icon (
). If
you are roaming on a digital system, you will see the
roaming icon along with the text – Digital Roam – .
Tip: Remember, when you are using your phone off the
Nationwide Sprint Network, always dial numbers using 11
digits (1 + area code + number).

SPH-D700.book Page 165 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

3. Enter your password at the prompt and follow the

Roaming on Other Digital Networks

voice prompts.

When you’re roaming on digital networks, your call
quality and security is similar to the quality you receive
when making calls on the Nationwide Sprint Network.
However, you may not be able to access certain
features, such as data services, depending on the
available network.

When you return to the Nationwide Sprint Network,
voicemail notification will resume as normal.

Setting Roam Mode
Your device allows you to control your roaming
capabilities. By using the Roaming menu option, you
can determine which signals your device accepts.

Note: If you’re on a call when you leave the Nationwide Sprint
Network, and your call is dropped in an area where you
think Sprint service is available, turn your phone off and
on again to reconnect to the network.

Choose from three different settings on your dual-band
device to control your roaming experience.

Checking for Voicemail Messages While
Roaming

1. Press

When you are roaming off the Nationwide Sprint
Network, you may not receive on-phone notification of
new voicemail messages. Callers can still leave
messages, but you will need to periodically check your
voicemail for new messages if you are in a roaming
service area for an extended period of time.

2. Tap Data roaming to connect to data service while

>
and tap
networks > Mobile networks.

> Wireless &

Sprint Service

roaming.

1. Dial 1 + area code + your phone number and tap
.

2. When you hear your voicemail greeting, tap

.

3A. Sprint Service: The Basics

165

SPH-D700.book Page 166 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Call Guard

To answer incoming roaming calls with Call Guard on:

Your device has two ways of alerting you when you are
roaming off the Nationwide Sprint Network: the
onscreen roaming icon and Call Guard. Call Guard
makes it easy to manage your roaming by requiring an
extra step before you can place or answer a roaming
call. (This additional step is not required when you
make or receive calls while on the Nationwide Sprint
Network.)
To turn Call Guard on or off:

1. Press

>

and tap

> Call settings.

2. Touch Call Guard to toggle the active state of this
function. When active, an extra key press is
required for dialing when in a roaming area.
Note: Call Guard is turned on by default on your device.
Voice dialing and speed dialing are not available when
you are roaming with Call Guard enabled.

To place roaming calls with Call Guard on:

1. From standby mode, dial 1 + area code + the
seven-digit number and tap

.

2. Touch OK.
166

3A. Sprint Service: The Basics

1. Press

Answer . (A message is displayed notifying you
that roaming charges will apply.)

2. Tap OK.
Note: If the Call Guard feature is set to On, you need to take
extra steps (such as dialing 1 + area code) to make
and receive roaming calls.

System Select
1. Press

>

and tap

> Call settings.

2. Tap System select to change the CDMA roaming
mode.
䡲

Sprint only to access only the home area mobile

network, which is the Nationwide Sprint Network.
This option also prevents roaming on other
networks.
䡲 Automatic to seek service on the Nationwide
Sprint Network. When Sprint service is
unavailable, the device searches for an alternate
system.

SPH-D700.book Page 167 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Data Roam Guard
Depending on service availability and roaming
agreements, your device may be able to access data
services while roaming on certain digital systems.
You can set your device to alert you when you are
roaming off the Nationwide Sprint Network and try to
use data services such as messaging.
Note: Data Roam Guard is turned on by default on your
device.

To set your Data Roam Guard notification:

1. Press

>
and tap
networks > Mobile networks.

> Wireless &

2. Tap Data Roaming Guard.
3. Tap an onscreen option: On or Off.
䊳

Sprint Service

To use data services when Data Roam Guard is active:
When a pop-up notification appears informing you
that data roam charges may apply, tap Connect or
Always Connect to connect.

3A. Sprint Service: The Basics

167

SPH-D700.book Page 168 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Important: Certain data services requests may require

3B. Web and Data Services
⽧

Getting Started With Data Services (page 168)

⽧

Navigating the Web (page 170)

⽧

Wi-Fi (page 177)

⽧

4G Services (page 179)

⽧

Email (page 182)

⽧

Using the Android Market (page 196)

⽧

Applications (page 197)

Getting Started With Data Services
With your Sprint service, you are ready to start enjoying
the advantages of data services. This section will help
you learn the basics of using your data services,
including managing your user name, launching a data
connection, and navigating the Web with your device.

168

3B. Web and Data Services

additional time to process. While your device is
loading the requested service, the touchscreen or
QWERTY keyboard may appear unresponsive
when in fact they are functioning properly. Allow
the device some time to process your data usage
request.

Your User Name
When you buy your device and sign up for service,
you’re automatically assigned a user name, which is
typically based on your name and a number, followed
by “@sprintpcs.com.” (For example, the third John
Smith to sign up for Sprint data services might have
jsmith003@sprintpcs.com as his user name.)
When you use data services, your user name is
submitted to identify you to the Nationwide Sprint
Network. Your user name is automatically programmed
into your device. You don’t have to enter it.

SPH-D700.book Page 169 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Updating Your User Name

1. Press

>
and tap
About phone > System Updates.

>

2. Tap Update Profile.

Launching a Web Connection
䊳

Press
and tap
>
(Browser).
(Your data connection starts and you see the
home page.)

Note: Internet connections can be made either through the
Sprint (3G or 4G) or via Wi-Fi (configured within the
Settings > Wireless & networks page).

While connecting, you may see an animation. Once
complete, you are connected to the default home
page.

is touched from within either an email or text message.

Data Connection Status and Indicators
Your device displays the current status of your data
connection through indicators at the top of the screen.
The following symbols are used:

Web and Data

Note: The Browser automatically launches when a Web link

If you choose to change your user name and select a
new one online, or make any changes to your services,
you must then update the profile on your device.

Your device is connected to the high-speed 4G
Sprint Mobile Broadband Network. When the
signal bands are animated, your device is
scanning and connecting. During data transfer,
the animated icon is not used (for example,
when you are opening a Web page).
When the signal bands are gray, your device is
connected to the network, signal is weak.
When both the bands and the 4G icon are
gray, you there is no coverage and you are
disconnected from the 4G network.

Tip: To change the device’s default launch page to your
current page, press
home page.

and tap More > Settings > Set

3B. Web and Data Services

169

SPH-D700.book Page 170 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Your device is connected to the high-speed
Sprint Mobile Broadband Network (EVDO).
When the signal bands are animated, your
device is transferring data (for example, when
you are opening a Web page); when the signal
bands are gray, your device is connected to the
network but is not currently transferring data (for
example, when you are viewing a Web page
that is completely open). In either state, you can
receive incoming calls.
If you do not see an indicator, your phone does not
have a current data connection. To launch a
connection, see “Launching a Web Connection” on
page 169.

Navigating the Web
Navigating through menus and websites during a data
session is easy once you have learned a few basics.
Note: Prior to gaining access to the SprintWeb home page,
you may be asked to enter your 10-digit PCS phone
number and tap OK. Entering your phone number is
not required for access to other Web pages.

170

3B. Web and Data Services

Scrolling
As with other parts of your device’s menu, you’ll have to
drag up and down to see everything on some
websites.
To scroll through a website’s page:
䊳

In a single motion, touch and drag across or up
and down a page.

Selecting
To select onscreen items or links:
䊳

Drag across a page, and then touch or tap an
onscreen link to select the link.

Links, which are displayed as underlined text, allow you
to jump to Web pages, select special functions, or even
place phone calls.

SPH-D700.book Page 171 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Zooming in and out on a Web page can be done now
without the need of an onscreen zoom tool. Just use
your fingers to pinch in or spread out on the screen.
To zoom in:

1. Place your thumb and index finger on the screen.
2. Bring them together (pinch) to zoom in.
To zoom out:

1. Place your thumb and index finger on the screen.
2. Expand them outward (spread) to zoom out.

Going Back
To go back one page:
䊳

Going to a Web Page
1. Tap the Address field (top of the browser window)
and enter a new Web address.
As you enter the address, possible matches are
displayed within an onscreen list. Tap an entry to
launch the desired website.

䡲

2. Tap Go to launch the new page.

Browser Menu
The browser menu offers additional options to expand
your use of the Web on your device.

Opening the Browser Menu
The browser menu may be opened anytime you have
an active data session, from any page you are viewing.

Press
on your device. Repeat this process
to keep going back through your Web page history
of recently visited pages.
DEL
for deleting text (like a BACKSPACE
key) when you are entering text.

Note: You can use

3B. Web and Data Services

171

Web and Data

Pinching and Zooming

SPH-D700.book Page 172 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

䊳

From any open Web page, press
(You will see the browser menu.)

.

䢇

Refresh: Reloads the current Web page.

䢇

Forward: Returns you to a previously viewed page.

䢇

More: Provide additional browser options:
䡲

Add bookmark (Menu+a): Assigns the current Web

䡲

Find on page (Menu+f): Searches the current Web

page as a new bookmark.
page for a word.
䡲

Select text (Menu +e): Selects text from the current

Web page.
䡲

Options available within the browser menu include:
New window: Launches a new Internet window while
maintaining the current Web page active.
䢇 Bookmarks: Allows you to access and manage your
bookmarks.
䢇 Windows: Displays the currently active browser
windows as an onscreen list. Tap a window entry to
launch that window.
䢇

172

3B. Web and Data Services

Page info (Menu+g): Displays the Name and URL

(website address) of the site you’re currently
viewing.
䡲 Share page (Menu +s): Allows you to send a URL
via Gmail, SMS, or Work Email (Outlook).
䡲 Downloads (Menu+d): Keeps a list of previously
downloaded content.
䡲 Settings (Menu+p): Lets you configure and
manage your browser settings.
䡲 Brightness Setting: Lets you configure the screen
brightness only for the browser application.

SPH-D700.book Page 173 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

QWERTY keyboard by using a combination of the
Menu button (
) and the specified key
combination.

Selecting Text on a Web Page

Going to a Specific Website
To go to a particular website by entering a URL (website
address):

1. Tap the URL field and enter a website address.
䡲

1. While on an active Web
page, press
to
open the browser menu.

2. Scroll to the area of the
webpage containing the
desired text.

As you type the address, if your desired website
appears within the suggested sites list, tap the
entry to begin surfing.

2. Tap Go.
Note: Not all websites are viewable on your device.

Adjusting Browser Page Settings

3. Tap More > Select text.

1. Press

4. Touch and drag across

2. Tap More > Settings.

the screen and highlight
the desired text. Any
selected text will appear
highlighted and then be
copied to the device’s
clipboard.

Web and Data

Note: These additional options can also be accessed via the

to open the browser menu.

3. Navigate to the Page content settings area and
select from one of the following page settings:
Text size: Adjusts the current onscreen text size.
Options include: Tiny, Small, Normal, Large, or
Huge.
䡲 Default zoom: Sets the default browser viewing
size. Choose from: Far, Medium, or Close.
䡲

3B. Web and Data Services

173

SPH-D700.book Page 174 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Open pages in overview: Provides an overview of
recently opened pages.
䡲 Text encoding: Adjusts the current text encoding.
䡲 Block pop-up windows: Prevents popup
advertisement or windows from appearing
onscreen. Remove the checkmark to disable this
function.
䡲 Load images: Allows web page images to be
loaded along with the other text components of a
loaded website.
䡲 Auto-fit pages: Allows web pages to be resized to
fit as much of the screen as possible.
䡲 Landscape-only display: Displays pages only in
the wider landscape screen orientation. Uncheck
to view the page in Portrait mode.
䡲 Enable Javascript: Enables javascript for the
current Web page. Without this feature, some
pages may not display properly. Remove the
checkmark to disable this function.
䡲 Enable plug-ins: Enables browser plugins for the
current Web page. Some pages may require
plugins to properly display or function.
䡲

174

3B. Web and Data Services

Open in background: New pages are launched in
a separate page and displayed behind the
current one. Remove the checkmark to disable
this function.
䡲 Set home page: Sets the current home page for
the Web browser (page 175).
䡲

Adjusting Browser Privacy Settings
1. Press

to open the browser menu.

2. Tap More > Settings.
3. Navigate to the Privacy settings area and select
from one of the following privacy settings:
Clear cache: Deletes all currently cached data.
Tap OK to complete the process.
䡲 Clear history: Clears the browser navigation
history. Tap OK to complete the process.
䡲 Accept cookies: Allows sites, that require cookies,
to save and read cookies from your device.
䡲 Clear all cookie data: Clears all current browser
cookie files.
䡲 Remember form data: Allows the device to store
data from any previously filled out forms. Remove
the checkmark to disable this function.
䡲

SPH-D700.book Page 175 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Clear form data: Deletes any stored data from
previously filled out forms. Tap OK to complete the

process.
Enable location: Allows sites to request access to
your current location (using the built-in GPS).
䡲 Clear location access: Clears location access for
all websites.
䡲

4. Press

䡲

Show security warnings. Notifies you if there is a

security issue with the current website. Remove
the checkmark to disable this function.

4. Press

to return to the browser.

Creating Website Settings
1. Press

to open the browser menu.

to return to the browser.

2. Tap More > Settings > Website settings. These

Adjusting Browser Security Settings

advanced settings that can be configured for
individual sites (ex: Clear location access).

1. Press

to open the browser menu.

2. Tap More > Settings.
3. Navigate to the Security settings area and select
from one of the following privacy settings:
Remember passwords. Stores usernames and
passwords for visited sites. Remove the
checkmark to disable this function.
䡲 Clear passwords. Deletes any previously stored
usernames or passwords. Tap OK to complete the
process.
䡲

Web and Data

䡲

3. Tap OK to complete the process.

Resetting the Browser to Default
1. Press

to open the browser menu.

2. Tap More > Settings > Reset to default.
3. Tap OK to complete the process.

Setting the Browser Home Page
1. Press

to open the browser menu.

2. Tap More > Settings > Set home page.
3. Delete the current address and enter a new web
page.

3B. Web and Data Services

175

SPH-D700.book Page 176 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

4. Tap OK to complete the process.

Creating Bookmarks
1. From any open Web
page, press
. (You
will see the browser
menu.)

2. Tap Bookmarks. Three
tabs are revealed:
䡲 Bookmarks: Displays a
list of your current Web
bookmarks.
䡲 Most visited: Displays a
list of your most
frequently visited
websites. Tap an entry to
launch the selected
page.
䡲 History: Displays a record of your browsing
history. These records are organized into folders
such as: Today, Yesterday, 5 days ago, and
1 month ago.

3. Tap Add (first entry in the Bookmarks tab).
176

3B. Web and Data Services

4. Enter a descriptive name for the new bookmark
and tap OK to store the new entry to your
Bookmarks list.

Creating Bookmarks From Other Tabs
1. From any open Web page, press

>

Bookmarks.

2. Tap either the Most visited or History tab.
3. Touch and hold an entry from the list to display an
onscreen popup menu.

4. Tap Add bookmark to add the selected entry to
your current list of bookmarks.
– or –

1. Repeat steps 1 and 2.
2. Tap the star icon adjacent to a website address.
The star now turns gold. This adds the “starred”
website to your current Bookmarks list.

Creating a New Homepage
1. From any open Web page, press
Bookmarks.

2. Tap either Most visited or History.

>

3. Touch and hold an entry from the list to display an
onscreen popup menu.

4. Tap Set as homepage to assign the selected entry
as your new homepage.

Adding Bookmarks to Your Home Screen
1. From any open Web page, press

.

2. Tap the Bookmarks tab.
3. Touch and hold an existing entry from the list to
display an onscreen popup menu.

4. Tap Add shortcut to Home to add the selected entry
to your Home screen.

Wi-Fi
About Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi (short for "wireless fidelity") is a term used for
certain types of wireless local area networks (WLAN).
These device types use an 802.11 wireless
specification to transmit and receive wireless data.

Wi-Fi communication requires access to an existing
and accessible Wireless Access Point (WAP). These
WAPs can either be Open (unsecured) as within most
Hot Spots, or Secured (requiring knowledge of the
Router name and password).
The Epic 4G is capable of communication with devices
using 802.11n speeds (802.11n connections should
support data rates of over 100 Mbps). 802.11n also
offers better communication ranges over earlier Wi-Fi
standards due to increased signal intensity. The Epic
4G is backwards compatible with previous WAP
technologies (802.11b and 802.11g).

Web and Data

SPH-D700.book Page 177 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Turning Wi-Fi On and Off
By default, your device’s Wi-Fi feature is turned off.
Turning Wi-Fi on makes your device able to discover
and connect to compatible in-range WAPs.
Turn Wi-Fi on:

1. Press

>
and tap
Wireless & networks.

>

2. Tap the Wi-Fi field to activate the feature (green
checkmark indicates active). The device scans for
available in-range wireless networks.

3B. Web and Data Services

177

SPH-D700.book Page 178 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

To turn Wi-Fi off:

1. Press

>
and tap
Wireless & networks > Wi-Fi.

Note: When you select an open network, you will be

2. Tap to remove the green checkmark and
deactivate Wi-Fi.
– or –

1. Touch and hold the Status bar, and then slide your
finger down the screen.

2. Tap the onscreen Wi-Fi icon to turn off the Wi-Fi
service (turns gray when disabled).
Note: Use of wireless data connections such as Wi-Fi and
Bluetooth can cause an added drain to your battery
and reduce your use times.

To connect to a Wi-Fi network:

1. Press

>
and tap
>
Wireless & networks > Wi-Fi settings.

䡲

automatically connected to the network.

>

The network names and security settings (Open
network or Secured with xxx) of detected Wi-Fi
networks are displayed in the Wi-Fi networks
section.

2. To manually add your new network connection:
Touch Add Wi-Fi network.
Enter the Network SSID. This is the name of your
Wi-Fi network.
䡲 Tap the Security field and select a security option.
This must match the current security setting on
your target network.
䡲 If secured, you will also need to enter the wireless
password. The show password option, reveals the
password as you type it instead of showing only
asterisks (****).
䡲 Tap Save to store the new information and
connect to the Wi-Fi network.
䡲
䡲

Note: The next time your device connects to a previously
accessed or secured wireless network, you are not
prompted to enter the wireless password again, unless
you reset your device back to its factory default settings.

To manually scan for a Wi-Fi network:

1. Press

>
and tap
>
Wireless & networks > Wi-Fi settings.

178

3B. Web and Data Services

SPH-D700.book Page 179 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

and tap Scan.

4G Services

Wi-Fi Status Indicators
The following icons show your Wi-Fi connection status
at a glance:
– Wi-Fi is connected and active.
– Wi-Fi active but there is a communication
issue with the target Wireless Access Point
(WAP).

Using the Wi-Fi Settings Menu
The Wi-Fi settings - Advanced menu allows you to set
up many of your device’s Wi-Fi service, including:
䢇 Setting your Wi-Fi sleep policy
䢇 Viewing your device’s MAC Address
䢇 Configuring use of either a DHCP or Static IP
To access the Bluetooth Settings menu:

Understanding 4G and 3G Coverage
4G is a service that must be included in your service
plan and also available within your area. 4G coverage
is currently available in only certain markets. For more
details on 4G availability go to: www.sprint.com/4G and
click the See 4G Cities link from the bottom of the page.

Web and Data

2. Press

Note: If 4G service is not included in your service plan, the 4G
icon will not appear in the Notifications area.

Note: 4G is up to 10x faster than 3G (based on download
speed comparison of 3G's ~600 kbps vs. 4G's ~
6 Mbps). (Actual speeds may vary.)
Sprint 4G is currently available in over 35 markets and
counting, and on select devices such as the Epic 4G.
See www.sprint.com/4G for details. Not all services are
available on 4G and coverage may default to 3G/
separate network where 4G unavailable.

1. Press

>
and tap
>
Wireless & networks > Wi-Fi settings.

2. Press

and tap Advanced.

3B. Web and Data Services

179

SPH-D700.book Page 180 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Depending on which icons appear within the
Notifications area, your services and features will
change. The following table indicates what functions
and features are available when combinations of these
service icons appear:

Notification Icons - Usage Case (4G/3G/Data)
3G unavailable - 4G Available – No
3G data available. Sprint 4G is
turned on and coverage is available,
4G signal strong.

Notification Icons - Usage Case (4G/3G/Data)
3G Phone Coverage Available –
Phone coverage available only, no
3G/4G data available. 4G turned Off.
3G Phone and Data Available –
Sprint 3G data and voice service is
available and active. 4G is turned
Off.
3G Available - No 4G coverage –
Sprint 3G data and voice service is
available and active. 4G is turned
On but there is no 4G coverage
(disconnected from network).
3G to 4G Transition – 3G and 4G
coverage is available. 4G service is
turned on and available in your area.
Data service is available and
switching from 3G to 4G service.

180

3B. Web and Data Services

Turning 4G On and Off
By default, your device’s 4G feature is turned off.
Important: 4G service must be added to your account
before attempting a connection to the 4G
network.

To turn 4G on:

1. Press

>
and tap
Wireless & networks.

>

2. Tap the 4G field to activate the feature (checkmark
indicates active). The device scans for an available
4G network.
– or –

1. Touch and hold the Status bar, and then slide your
finger down the screen.

SPH-D700.book Page 181 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

service (turns green when enabled).

1. Touch and hold the Status bar, slide your finger
down the screen.

Web and Data

2. Tap the onscreen 4G icon to turn on the 4G

2. Tap the onscreen 4G icon to turn off the service
(turns gray when disabled).

Sprint Mobile Hotspot
Sprint Mobile Hotspot allows you to turn your phone
into a Wi-Fi hotspot. The feature works best when used
in conjunction with 4G data services (although 3G
service can also be used). (See “4G Services” on
page 179.)
To set up your Sprint Mobile Hotspot:

1. Press

To turn 4G off:

1. Press

>
and tap
Wireless & networks.

and tap

>

(Sprint

Hotspot).
>

2. Tap 4G to remove the green checkmark and
deactivate 4G services.
Note: Use of 4G communication and Sprint Mobile Hot Spot
service can cause an added drain to your battery and
reduce your battery use times.

2. Tap Sprint Hotspot and place a checkmark in the
adjacent field to activate the service.
Using both 4G service and Hotspot drains your
device’s battery at a much faster rate than when
using any other feature combination.

䡲

Note: The best way to keep using the device as a hotspot is
to have it connected to a power supply.

– or –

3B. Web and Data Services

181

SPH-D700.book Page 182 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Important: Write down the passkey (password) for this WPA

Email

communication (shown onscreen).

To connect to the Sprint Mobile Hotspot:

1. Enable Wi-Fi (wireless) functionality on your target
device (laptop, media device, etc.).

2. Scan for Wi-Fi networks from the device and select
your Epic 4G hotspot from the network list.
The default name for your Epic 4G hotspot is
SPH-D700XXX. You can change the name by
pressing
> Settings > Device name from the
Sprint Hotspot screen.

䡲

3. Select this device and follow your onscreen
instructions to enter the passkey (provided on the
Sprint Hotspot page).

4. Launch your Web browser to confirm you have an
Internet connection.

182

3B. Web and Data Services

Your device’s Email applications let you access and
manage multiple email accounts simultaneously in one
convenient location.
Although there is a separate Gmail application,
the main email application can manage both
Internet-based email services (Gmail™ and Yahoo™)
and Corporate Work Email (Outlook®).
The device can also be manually configured to
connect to other email systems.
Note: If you have multiple email accounts, you must configure
each account with its own settings.

If you want to send and receive email messages
through an ISP (Internet Service Provider) account
(such as Outlook), or if you wish to use your device to
access your corporate email through a VPN (Virtual
Private Network), you will first need to set up an IMAP
or POP account.
䡲 IMAP (Internet Message Access Protocol) - This
mail retrieval protocol is frequently used in large
networks and commercial and institutional
settings. IMAP4 is the current standard.

䡲

POP (Post Office Protocol) - This protocol is
supported by most ISPs and is currently more
common among consumer applications. POP3 is
the current standard.

Note: For more information, review your email carrier’s
literature or contact your IT administrator.

Email Icons/Shortcuts

䡲

Depending on your synchronization settings, Google
Mail, along with calendar events, phone numbers and
other contact information on your device are
automatically synchronized between your device and
your Gmail/Google Mail account on the Web.
Note: You must have a valid and active Google account prior

– IMAP/POP3 Mail shortcut (such as Yahoo™
and Outlook™).

From a computer, launch a Web browser and
navigate to www.google.com.

to using this email client.

Important: You must log into Google after every power cycle
of your device. Logging into Gmail (via the device)
does not sign you into your Google account.
Gmail logging and access are separate from your
main Google account.

– Gmail shortcut

Status Bar - Notifications
– New email message received
– New Gmail message received

Google Mail (Gmail)
This email client is Google’s Web-based email service.
A Gmail/Google Mail account is created once you
sign-up for a new Google account online. (See
“Creating a Google Account” on page 55.)

Web and Data

SPH-D700.book Page 183 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Setting Up a Gmail Account via the Device
1. Press

and tap

>

(Gmail).

2. Enter your Email address and Password.
3. Follow the onscreen prompts.
䡲

The first time you connect, you are asked to give
this Internet mail account a unique onscreen
name and enter From name (displayed in your
outgoing emails within the From field).

3B. Web and Data Services

183

SPH-D700.book Page 184 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

The unique account name is used to differentiate
this account from other email accounts accessed
by your device.
䡲 See “Adding Additional Internet Email Accounts”
on page 189.
䡲

Note: You must have a valid and active Google account
(xxxxxx@gmail.com) prior to Gmail email setup and
configuration.

Create and Send Gmail
1. Press

and tap

>

.

2. Tap Inbox to open your inbox.
3. Press

and tap Compose.

4. Enter the message recipient’s email address in the
To field.

If you are sending the email to several recipients,
separate the email addresses with a comma.
䡲 You can add as many message recipients as you
want.
䡲

Your Gmail address is then used to log into your
account via the device.

Note: Signal interruptions or incorrect username or password
information can cause completion issues.

Note: To send a carbon copy (Cc) or a blind carbon copy
(Bcc) of the current email to other recipients, press
and tap Add Cc/Bcc.

Opening Gmail
1. Press

and tap

>

2. Tap an existing email message.
To refresh your Gmail messages:
䊳

184

Press

and tap Refresh.

3B. Web and Data Services

.

5. Tap the Subject field and enter the email subject.
6. Tap the Compose Mail field and compose your
email.
To add a picture attachment, press
Attach (from the bottom of the screen).

䡲

and tap

SPH-D700.book Page 185 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

7. Once complete, tap Send.
Tap Save as draft to save the current email as a
draft. To later view your draft email messages,
from the Inbox, tap the Drafts folder.
䡲 To delete the current email message, tap Discard.
䡲

Creating a Gmail Signature
1. From a computer, launch your preferred Web
browser and navigate to www.google.com.

2. From within your Gmail Settings page, navigate to
the Settings > General tab and enter your signature
into the Signature field. By default, signature is
turned off.

Accessing Email Messages
Depending on your email type, account settings, Email
notifications, ringtone notification, etc, the device
displays the email message briefly in the status bar
when you receive a new email.
A new Internet email message (
) or Gmail
message
icon appears within the Notifications
area of the Status bar to notify you of a new email.

Web and Data

Select the picture you want to attach (indicated by
a green checkmark) and tap OK.
䡲 Tap
to delete a selected attachment from
your current email.
䡲

To view a new email:

1. Press

and tap

>

.

– or –
Touch and hold the Status bar, and then slide your
finger down the screen. (See “Using the
Notifications Panel” on page 40.)

2. Tap the new email from the Notifications list to
launch the Inbox tab.

3. Scroll up and down the email by dragging your
finger up and down the screen.

3B. Web and Data Services

185

SPH-D700.book Page 186 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

To reply to an email message:
Status bar

1. With the email message displayed:

New email
message

From within Gmail, tap the recipient name from
the To: field and select an email application to
begin replying to the sender. Choose from:
Compose (Gmail) or Email.
䡲 From within Email, tap Reply or Reply all.
䡲

Email
Screen

2. Enter a new message body and tap Send.
To delete an email message:
䊳

With the email message displayed, tap Delete.

Configuring Gmail Settings
Email functions

1. Press

and tap

>

.

2. Tap Inbox to open the contents of your inbox.
3. Press

186

3B. Web and Data Services

and tap Settings.

SPH-D700.book Page 187 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

settings:
䡲

Signature: Allows you to create an email signature

for your outgoing Gmail emails.
䡲 Confirm delete: Shows a dialog whenever you
delete an email.
䡲 Batch operations: Allows label operations.
䡲 Clear search history: Removes all the searched
you have performed.
䡲 Labels: Selects which labels are synchronized.
䡲 Email notifications: Activates the email notification
icon to appear within the Notifications area of the
Status bar when a new Internet mail (Gmail, etc..)
is received.
䡲 Select ringtone: Plays a selected ringtone once a
new email message is received.
䡲 Vibrate: Activates a vibration once a new email
message is received.

Email
Setting Up an Email Account via the Device
1. Press

and tap

(Email).

2. Follow the onscreen instructions to setup an email
account.
Tap Manual setup to configure your connection
settings manually (POP3 or IMAP). Follow the
onscreen prompts and enter the information
specific to your carrier.
䡲 The first time you connect, you are asked to give
this Internet mail account a unique onscreen
name and enter From name (displayed in your
outgoing emails within the From field).
䡲 The unique account name is used to differentiate
this account from other email accounts accessed
by your device.(See “Adding Additional Internet
Email Accounts” on page 189.)

Web and Data

4. This menu provides both field information and

䡲

Note: Signal interruptions or incorrect username or password
information can cause completion issues.

3B. Web and Data Services

187

SPH-D700.book Page 188 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Opening Email

䡲

(Email).

1. Press

and tap

2. Press

and tap Accounts.

Note: To send a carbon copy (Cc) or a blind carbon copy
(Bcc) of the current email to other recipients, tap the
Cc/Bcc fields.

3. Select an email account.
4. Tap an existing email message.
Press

and tap Refresh.

Create and Send Email
.

1. Press

and tap

2. Press

and tap Accounts.

3. Select an email account.
4. Tap Inbox to open the contents of your inbox.
5. Press

and tap Compose.

6. Enter the message recipient’s email address in the
To field.
䡲

188

7. Tap the Subject field and enter the email subject.
8. Tap the Compose Mail field and compose your

To refresh your Email messages:
䊳

You can add as many message recipients as you
want.

If you are sending the email to several recipients,
separate the email addresses with a comma.

3B. Web and Data Services

email.
To add a picture attachment, tap Attach (from the
bottom of the screen).
䡲 Select the picture you want to attach (indicated by
a green checkmark) and tap OK.
䡲 Tap
to delete a selected attachment from
your current email.
䡲

9. Once complete, tap Send.
Tap
> Save as draft to save the current
email as a draft. To later view your draft email
messages, from the Inbox, tap the Drafts folder.
䡲 To delete the current email message, tap Discard.
䡲

SPH-D700.book Page 189 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Using
only reveals all currently added Email
accounts.To view additional email accounts within the
main Email screen, they must first be added.

.

1. Press

and tap

2. Press

and tap Accounts.

3. Press

and tap Add account.

4. Follow the onscreen prompts to add additional
Internet-based email accounts such as Yahoo!,
AOL, or other POP or IMAP accounts.

Configuring Email Settings
1. Press

and tap

.

2. Tap the email account from the Accounts area of
the Email screen.

3. Tap Inbox to open the contents of your inbox.
4. Press

and tap Account settings.

5. This menu provides both field information and
settings:
䡲

Account name: displays your uniquely created
account display name.

Your name: displays the name used in the From
field of your outgoing emails.
䡲 Email check frequency: Tap to adjust the time
interval used by your device to check your email
account for new emails.
● Options include: Never, Every 5 minutes, Every
10 minutes, Every 15 minutes, Every 30 minutes,
and Every hour.
䡲 Default account: Assign this account as the default
email used for outgoing messages.
䡲 Email notifications: Activates the email notification
icon to appear within the Notifications area of the
Status bar when a new Internet mail (Gmail, etc..)
is received.
䡲 Select ringtone: Plays a selected ringtone once a
new email message is received.
䡲 Vibrate: Activates a vibration once a new email
message is received.
䡲 Incoming settings: Adjusts the incoming email
parameters, such as username, password, and
other incoming connection parameters (ex: IMAP
server).
䡲

3B. Web and Data Services

Web and Data

Adding Additional Internet Email Accounts

189

SPH-D700.book Page 190 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Outgoing settings: Adjusts the outgoing
parameters, such as username, password, and
other incoming connection parameters (ex: SMTO
server).
䡲 Forward with files: Allows you to maintain any
attachments while forwarding a current email.
䡲 Signature: Allows you to create an email signature
for your outgoing Gmail emails.
䡲

Corporate Email (Outlook)
The main Email application (
) also provides
access to your Outlook Exchange server via your
device. If your company uses Microsoft Exchange
Server 2003 or 2007 as the corporate email system,
you can use this email application to wirelessly
synchronize your email, Contacts, and Task information
directly with your company’s Exchange server.
Important: This Outlook application does not utilize
®

Microsoft ActiveSync to synchronize the device
to your remote Exchange Server. This
synchronization is done wirelessly over the air
(OTA) and not via a direct connection.

190

3B. Web and Data Services

Setting Up a Corporate Email
1. Press

and tap

2. Press

and tap Accounts.

3. Press

and tap Add account.

>

.

4. Enter your Email address and Password
information, and then tap Next. Consult your
Network Administrator for further details.
䡲

Email address: your Outlook work email address.

䡲

Password: typically your network access

password (case-sensitive).

5. Tap Exchange account (from the add new email
account screen).

6. When prompted to provide additional detailed
information, scroll down the screen and tap Next.

7. Enter a Domain\Username, Password, and
Exchange Server information.
䡲

Domain\Username: Use the arrow keys to place
your cursor before your username and enter your
network domain\desktop login username.

SPH-D700.book Page 191 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

the “\” between the Domain and Username.
䡲

Password: typically your network access

䡲

Exchange Server: your exchange server remote
email address. Typically starts with mail.XXX.com.

password (case-sensitive).

Obtain this information from your company
network administrator. Do not accept the default
entry as this is a guess based on returned
information
䡲 If your network requires SSL encryption, tap the
Use secure connection (SSL) field to place a
checkmark in the box and activate this additional
level of security.
●

If your exchange server requires this feature,
leaving this field unchecked can prevent
connection.

Note: Signal interruptions or incorrect username or password
information can cause completion issues.

8. Read the onscreen activation disclaimer and, if

9. Configure your Email check frequency, Amount to
synchronize (days to synchronize between your
device and server), and activate any other email
settings, and then tap Next.

10. Identify your new account with a unique name and
provide the outgoing name text then tap Done.

Web and Data

Important: Key info here is the Domain information. Maintain

Important: You can synchronize over the air (not directly) with
an Exchange Server running Microsoft Exchange
Server 2003 Service Pack 2 (SP2) or Microsoft
Exchange Server 2007.

Note: You can have multiple Work Email (Microsoft Exchange
ActiveSync) accounts active on your device.

Opening Corporate Email
1. Press

and tap

>

.

2. Tap a message to read, manage, and reply to your
email messages.
From your Inbox screen, press
to select
options, such as Refresh, Compose, Accounts,
Account settings, Sort, or Search.

䡲

prompted, tap Next.

3B. Web and Data Services

191

SPH-D700.book Page 192 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

䡲

While in a message, use Reply, Delete, or Reply all
or press
to select messaging options, such
as Add to Contacts, Forward, Save to Calendar, or
Display Mode (Original mode or Positive mode).

Create and Send Email
1. From the Inbox, press

carbon copy (Bcc) of the current email to other
recipients, tap the Cc/Bcc fields.

3. Tap the Subject field and enter the email subject.
4. Tap the Body field and compose your email.

and tap Compose.

2. Enter the message recipient’s email address in the
To field.

Choose recipients from the following sources:
● Recent to access your list of recent contacts.
● Contacts to access your current Contacts
page
● Group to access any available Groups (within
which are associated Contacts entries).
● Search to search for a contact from within your
device.
䡲 If you are sending the email to several recipients,
separate the email addresses with a comma.
䡲 You can add as many message recipients as you
want.
䡲

192

Note: To send an additional carbon copy (Cc) or a blind

3B. Web and Data Services

To add a picture attachment, tap Attach (from the
bottom of the screen).
䡲 You can access the internal microSD card and
navigate to the file you wish to attach.
䡲 Tap the file you wish to attach and tap OK.
䡲

To reply to an email message:

1. From the Inbox, tap an email message.
2. With the email message displayed, tap either Reply
or Reply all.
– or –
With the email message displayed, tap either Reply
or Reply all.
䡲 If you select Forward (press
) you must
specify the message’s recipients.

SPH-D700.book Page 193 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

To delete an email message:
䊳

Touch and hold an email (from your inbox list) and
select Delete from the onscreen context menu.
– or –

Configuring Corporate Email Settings
After your initial setup, you are taken to the Settings
menu for your new Work Email account.
Account Settings: configures send and receive settings,

such as email signature, notifications, syncing, etc.
>
Accounts & sync.

within the
Corporate account field to
reveal the account’s
synchronization settings
screen.

3. Toggle either the Sync

With the email message displayed, tap Delete.

1. Press

2. Tap

Web and Data

3. Enter a new message body and tap Send.

and tap

>

Contacts or Sync Calendar

fields to force the device
to manually resync either
the exchange Contacts or
Calendar entries.
– or –
Tap Account settings and
configure any other email
parameters you wish to
Setting Options
synchronize. (See
“Synchronizing Accounts” on page 73.)
To configure Corporate Email settings:

1. Press

>
Accounts & sync.

and tap

>

2. Tap

within the Corporate account field to
reveal the account’s synchronization settings
screen.

3B. Web and Data Services

193

SPH-D700.book Page 194 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

3. Tap the parameters you wish to synchronize.
䡲

●

●

●

●

●

194

●

Account settings allows you to configure:
Account name displays the name used by the
device to track the account.
Your name displays the name used in the
From field within your outgoing emails.
Email check frequency configures the
frequency which the device queries the
remote server for new email changes. Choose
from: Automatic (Push), Never, Every 5 minutes,
Every 10 minutes, Every 15 minutes, Every 30
minutes, or Every hour.
Amount to synchronize to assign the sync
range for your incoming and outgoing emails
between your device and your external
exchange server. How many days worth of
emails should the device and server
synchronize. Choose from: One day, Three
days, One week, Two weeks, or One month.
Default account assigns this account as the
default used when sending out new emails.

3B. Web and Data Services

●

●

●

●

●

●

Email notifications enables the device to
display a status bar icon
when new
emails have been received.
Select ringtone assigns an audible ringtone
when a new or upcoming event is pending.
Vibrate assigns a vibration when a new or
upcoming event is pending.
Incoming settings provides access to the
Domain, password, and exchange server
parameter fields.
Sync contacts synchronizes the contacts
between your device and the remote
exchange server. A checkmark indicates the
feature is enabled.
Sync calendar synchronizes your exchange
calendar entries between your device and the
remote exchange server. A checkmark
indicates the feature is enabled.
Forward with files causes any outgoing email
replay to include any currently attached files. A
checkmark indicates the feature is enabled.

SPH-D700.book Page 195 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Signature allows you to create an outgoing

email signature attached to new emails sent
from your device.

4. Press

to return to the previous screen.

For more detailed Corporate email information, see
“Corporate Email (Outlook)” on page 190. For more
information on Corporate Calendar synchronizing, see
Synchronizing Corporate Calendar Events (page 106).
To create a Corporate Email Signature:
This signature can differ from any current Email
signature on your local Outlook client. This signature is
applied to any outgoing emails originating on your
device.

1. Press

>
Accounts & sync.

and tap

>

2. Tap

within the Corporate account field to
reveal the account’s synchronization settings
screen.

3. Scroll to the bottom of the list and tap Signature.

5. Tap OK to store the new signature.

Configuring Data Synchronization Settings
This feature allows you to determine which current
applications are synchronized with external server and
at what intervals.

Web and Data

●

1. Press

>
and tap
>
Accounts & sync. These settings can affect data

minute usage, please refer to your current data
plan for more details.

2. Tap any of the following options:
Background data: Allows data synchronization to
occur as a background function. It allows this to
occur behind the scenes and does not affect any
current use of the device.
䡲 Auto-sync: Requires the device to maintain
synchronization with the remote server providing
data to your selected applications.
䡲

3. Press

to store your changes and return to
the Home screen.

4. Delete the current default text and enter your new
email signature.

3B. Web and Data Services

195

SPH-D700.book Page 196 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Using the Android Market

Note: Use caution with applications which request access to
any personal data, functions, or significant amounts of
data usage times.

The Android Market provides direct access to a large
selection of applications which you can download and
install on your device.

5. If prompted, follow the onscreen instructions to pay

Accessing the Market

6. Check the progress of the current download by

1. Press

and tap

(Market).

2. If not already logged in with your Google account,
tap Next.

3. Tap Sign in and enter your Google account

of service.

Selecting and Installing a Google Application
and tap

.

2. Browse through the categories, find an application
you're interested in, and tap the name.

3. Read the application descriptions.
4. Tap Install.

196

opening the Notifications panel.

7. After the item is downloaded and installed on your
device, the content download icon
the notification area of the status bar.

appears in

8. On the Android Market screen, tap Downloads, tap

information.

4. Touch Accept to agree to the Android Market terms

1. Press

for the application.

3B. Web and Data Services

the installed application in the list, and then tap
Open.

Launching an Installed Google Application
1. Press

and tap

.

2. Tap the newly installed application.
Tip: You can also access recent apps from the Google
Market. Tap [

> Downloads and tap the application.

SPH-D700.book Page 197 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

If the Android operating system is ever updated, any
data contained on the device will be erased. The only
data stored on the device are Google applications
available via the Android Market.
Note: Pictures and music are stored on the microSD card.
Contacts and Calendars are stored remotely on with
your remote Google or Outlook servers.

1. Log into your Google account via the device.
2. Press

and tap

> Downloads.

3. Scroll through the list of previously downloaded
Google applications and choose the one you wish
to reinstall.

4. Follow the onscreen instructions.

Applications
You can access a wide variety of applications in many
different categories with your phone and data service.
Your phone comes preloaded with links to the
following applications:

䢇
䢇
䢇
䢇
䢇
䢇

Google
NASCAR Sprint Cup Mobile

Web and Data

Reinstalling a Google Application

Sprint Football Live
Sprint Zone
Sprint Mobile Hotspot (see page 181)
Qik

To get started with applications:

1. Press

and tap
>
(NASCAR
Sprint Cup Mobile). (The browser will start and take
you to the download menu for the application.)

2. Follow the instructions to customize your
application (such as selecting a favorite team or
driver) or press
to explore your options.
Important Privacy Message – Sprint’s policies often do not
apply to third-party applications. Third-party applications may
access your personal information or require Sprint to disclose
your customer information to the third-party application
provider. To find out how a third-party application will collect,
access, use, or disclose your personal information, check the
application provider’s policies, which can usually be found on
their website. If you aren’t comfortable with the third-party
application’s policies, don’t use the application.

3B. Web and Data Services

197

SPH-D700.book Page 198 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Note: Some Sprint data applications may not work with a
Wi-Fi connection present. If prompted, disable your
device's Wi-Fi feature while using these applications.

NASCAR Sprint Cup Mobile
Now you have the ability to get every bit of NASCAR
coverage, news, and stats right on your device.

1. Press

and tap

>

(NASCAR

Sprint Cup Mobile).

2. If prompted, read the permission check disclaimer,
make a selection and tap OK. Follow the onscreen
instructions until you reach the main NASCAR
Sprint Cup Mobile page.

3. Navigate the main page by scrolling around using
the touchscreen.

4. Tap an onscreen option to activate features that
include:
Home is the main NASCAR homepage where you
can view stats on a current race, choose to follow
a specific driver, view special NASCAR
promotions and other NASCAR-specific
multimedia content.

䡲

198

3B. Web and Data Services

Press
and tap Home to return to the
main NASCAR page. This applies to each of
these options.
䡲 Leaderboard launches a an onscreen board
showing the ranking of leaders in the competition.
䡲 Race Recap provides overviews of the current
races, pictures, commentary, additional photos,
and race stats.
䡲 SPEED displays a list of selectable multimedia
video clips from the SPEED channel that are
specific to NASCAR.
䡲 Point Standings displays race stats, driver info,
news, photos, etc. for the All-Star race.
䡲 My Driver to customize your NASCAR experience
by following specific drivers. Information includes
driver-specific stats and NASCAR RSS feeds. You
can also get additional stats, review other driver
info, or change drivers.
䡲 Stats/Sched lets you track race information such
as: NSCS Recap, NNS Recap, Point Standings,
Season Stats, and Schedule.
●

SPH-D700.book Page 199 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Miss Sprint Cup is your insider to NASCAR by

providing news, information, blogs and twitter
updates to the goings-on within NASCAR.
䡲 Videos displays a list of selectable multimedia
content. Other features include streaming
multimedia content from NASCAR radio stations
or other racing radio shows.
䡲 News & Alerts provides you with quick access to
NASCAR-specific news, photos, and driver stats.
You can also customize alerts for new information
such as ALL NASCAR News, Sprint Cup News,
etc.
䡲 Community lets you take part in online fantasy
racing, access Games, News, Videos, take part in
Polls, and access other Special Promotions.
䡲 Fantasy lets you connect with other NASCAR
enthusiasts. You will have to login using a
NASCAR.COM Community login. If you do not
have this information, visit community.nascar.com to
get an account.
䡲 FanZone displays a list of selectable content
available to Sprint subscribers such as
Sweepstakes, Video clips (footage and music)
and Screensavers.

Settings and Help displays help information for
usage of the NASCAR application and features.
䡲 Exit to quit the NASCAR application.
● Press
and tap Exit.
䡲

Web and Data

䡲

Sprint Football Live
Get the Football live on your phone. It lets you be right
in the middle of your favorite game by being a part of
previews, blogs, discussions groups, fantasy football,
etc.

1. Press

and tap

>

(Sprint Football

Live).

2. Tap Continue and follow the onscreen instructions
to customize your football experience by choosing
your favorite team.

3. Access any of the following features by pressing
(menu):
Note: Use the directional keys to move around the
application’s menu features.

3B. Web and Data Services

199

SPH-D700.book Page 200 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

2010 Draft (default home page) displays a screen
full of draft information such as Draft Insider,
Exclusive Blog, Draft Tracker, Pick’Em, Mock Draft,
and Draft Prospects.
䡲 Favorite Team launches a team-specific page with
content such as top stories, RSS feeds, Rumor
information, Schedules, Team Alerts, and the
ability to change your favorite team selection.
䡲 News provides AP league news, Rumor and
News, PFTV, Injury Info, Transactions, Legal, and
other football related information, photos and
videos.
䡲 Tweets launches an onscreen Twitter page
specific to the NFL. Also included onscreen is a
real-time RSS new feed.
䡲 Team Pages allows you select from wither the AFC
or NFC conferences, and then display content
such as top stories, RSS feeds, Rumor
information, Schedules, Team Alerts, and the
ability to change your favorite team selection.
䡲 Help/About displays help information for Sprint
Football Live topics such as: General, Home,
News, Twitter, Team Page, About, or Alerts.
䡲

200

3B. Web and Data Services

䡲

Exit allows you to exit the Sprint Football Live
application. Tap YES to exit.

Sprint Zone
A free application that lets you stay connected to all the
latest news and information from Sprint. Included here
are Sprint customer promotions, news, feedback,
featured apps, and tips/tricks for your device.

1. Press

and tap

(SprintZone).

2. Navigate through the list to find your relevant
topics.

3. Tap a topic link to continue to that page.

Qik
Qik is a mobile video sharing service that lets you
record and share experiences with your friends, family,
and your favorite social networks.

1. Press

and tap

>

(Qik) > Sign in.

Note: If you do not already have a Qik account, touch Create
and follow the onscreen prompts to create your new
account.

2. Touch the Username and Password fields and
enter your information.

3. Tap Sign in. Your device
then communicates with
the Qik servers to confirm
your information.

4. Follow the onscreen
instructions. For more
information, visit:
http://qik.com/.

2. Tap

to begin recording.

3. Tap

to stop recording.

4. Enter a title for your video segment and select
those services you wish to use to distribute your
video.
䡲 Services such as Twitter, Facebook, SMS, and
E-mail ask that you select a recipient for your
video segment.

Web and Data

SPH-D700.book Page 201 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Configure Front Facing
Camera
1. Press

> Settings >

Camera.

2. Tap Front to enable the
front facing camera lens (to the upper-right of the
screen).

Recording Video
1. Tap Record from the main Qik menu (shown
above).

3B. Web and Data Services

201

SPH-D700.book Page 202 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

3C. Entertainment:
TV and Music
⽧

DivX (page 202)

⽧

Sprint TV (page 205)

⽧

Music (page 205)

⽧

Streaming Music (page 208)

⽧

YouTube (page 208)

⽧

AllShare (page 209)

Sprint TV gives you the ability to listen to audio clips
and to view video clips right from your device’s display.
Watch live TV and catch up on episodes of your
favorite shows – anywhere on the Nationwide Sprint
Network.*
Note: The best recording setting for MP4 video playback on
this device is H.264 for Android™ or PSP™.
* Sprint TV coverage not available everywhere. Content and
lineup subject to change. Select channels also available
for casual usage. Visit www.sprint.com/tvguide for more
information.

202

3C. Entertainment: TV and Music

Amazon MP3 lets you preview, purchase, download,
and listen to over a million songs right on your device.
You can even add songs from your own library to
round out your on-the-go playlist.

DivX
The Epic 4G recognizes DivX®
encoded media files.
Devices certified to play DivX
video:
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX® is a
digital video format created by
DivX, Inc. This is an official DivX Certified device that
plays DivX video. Visit www.divx.com for more
information and software tools to convert your files into
DivX video.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX® Certified
device must be registered in order to play DivX Videoon-Demand (VOD) content. DivX Certified® to play
DivX® video up to HD 720p, including premium content.
To generate the registration code, locate the DivX VOD
section in the device setup menu.

SPH-D700.book Page 203 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

[Important: DivX VOD content is protected by a DivX
DRM (Digital Rights Management) system that restricts
playback to only registered DivX Certified devices.
If you try to play DivX VOD content not authorized for
your device, the message "Authorization Error" will be
displayed and your content will not play.] Learn more at
www.divx.com/vod.
Note: DivX VOD content is protected by a DivX DRM (Digital
Rights Management) system that restricts playback to
only registered DivX Certified devices.

Locating Your VOD Registration Number
1. Press

>
and tap
>
About phone > Legal information > License settings
> DivX® VOD > Register.

2. Write down your Registration code.
Note: Pat. 7,295,673; 7,460,688; 7,519,274

3. Tap OK.

Register your DivX Device for VOD
Playback of Purchased Movies
To play purchased DivX
movies on your Samsung
Epic device, you will first
need to complete a
one-time registration using
both your device and your
computer.

1. Write down the DivX
registration code that
appears onscreen.
Copy this 8 or 10-digit
number down.

TV and Music

Go to vod.divx.com with this code to complete the
registration process and learn more about DivX VOD.

2. Verify you have the
latest DivX software
running on your
computer. Download
the free player (for your
computer) from
www.divx.com.

3C. Entertainment: TV and Music

203

SPH-D700.book Page 204 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

3. Open the DivX Player on your computer and from
within the VOD menu, select Register a DivX
Certified Device...
䡲 You are prompted to log in or create a DivX
account if your account information has not
already been saved in DivX Player.

4. Follow the instructions in DivX Player to enter the
registration code from step 2 and create a device
nickname (ex: "Pat or D700").

5. Choose a location on your computer to download
the DivX registration video with the same title as
your device nickname (ex: Pat.divx).

9. Press

and tap
>
(See “My Files” on page 112.)

(My Files).

10. Tap a folder and scroll down or up until you locate
your registration DivX video file.

11. Tap the file to play it. Once you play the registration
file on your device, your registration is complete!
Return to the Divx VOD Manager screen (from within
your computer’s DivX Player) and confirm both your
computer and your new device appears in the list of
registered DivX devices.
Note: There is no special registration or configuration
necessary to playback DRM-free DivX movies.

6. Follow the onscreen instructions to download the
file and initiate the transfer process.

Registration of your device is only required for playback
of protected DivX material.

7. Connect your Samsung Epic to the computer via
USB and transfer this video. (See “Connecting
Your Device to Your Computer” on page 125.)

8. From the Registration screen (Transfer), select USB
(the device) as the target destination for the
registration video (created in step 6) and click
Start.

204

3C. Entertainment: TV and Music

Playback Media Files
1. Press

and tap

>

(My Files).

2. Tap a folder and scroll down or up until you locate
your selected file.

3. Tap the desired movie or music file.

SPH-D700.book Page 205 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Your Sprint TV Channel Options
The Sprint TV application offers a wide variety of
accessible channels. Subscription options include
comprehensive basic packages as well as a full menu
of “a la carte” channels. Visit www.sprint.com/tvguide for
more information on channels and pricing.
Note: Available categories and content are subject to change.

Watching TV
1. Press

and tap
>
(SprintTV).
Depending on your settings, your device may
prompt you to accept a data connection.

Note: SprintTV can only be viewed over a cellular connection.
Turn off your Wi-Fi communication prior to using this
application. If prompted, tap Disable Wi-Fi to continue.

Note: The first time you access a channel, the system will
prompt you to purchase access (unless the channel
doesn't have a monthly fee). Tap Subscribe to
purchase access, or tap Preview to view a preview of
the selected channel.

4. Tap a desired clip to view the program. The clip will
automatically load and begin playing.

TV and Music

Sprint TV

Tip: Scroll through the channels to view more selections.
Once you find a channel that you want to watch or listen
to, simply touch it and wait approximately three seconds,
and the channel begins loading.

Music
The Amazon MP3 store lets you purchase and
download digital music files to play on your device or
computer. (You must have an amazon.com account to
purchase and download music from Amazon MP3.)

2. Select TV, Radio, Favs, or More to display channel
options.

3. Tap an entry to select a channel from the Sprint TV
listings or to select an available category.

3C. Entertainment: TV and Music

205

SPH-D700.book Page 206 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Purchasing and Downloading Music from
Amazon
1. Press

and tap

>

MP3

(Amazon MP3).

2. Select an onscreen category (Bestselling Albums,
Bestselling Songs, Browse By Genre, or Search).

3. Follow the onscreen instructions to locate the
desired track or album.

4. Tap the song title to listen to an audio preview.
Tap the song title again to stop playback.
Preview allows you to play an audio clip of the
selected song.

䡲

5. Once you have located a desired song title or
album, tap [price] > Buy.
Pressing BUY allows you to purchase the song
and download it to your device’s microSD card.
● When you select Buy, you will need to log into
your Amazon account. (If there is no microSD
card installed or if there is not enough free
memory space on the card, you will see an
alert.)

䡲

206

3C. Entertainment: TV and Music

●

Once the song has been downloaded to your
microSD card, you can use the Music
application to playback the file.

Accessing the Music Player
1. Press

and tap

>

(Music).

2. From the Music display, select an option:
Artists to display your current local music files
sorted by artist.
䡲 Albums to display your current local music files
sorted by album.
䡲 Songs to browse through all of your downloaded
music and any additional songs you have loaded
onto your microSD card from your computer.
䡲 Playlists to select a customized playlist you’ve
created to organize your music.
䡲

3. Once you’ve displayed a list of songs, you can
browse through your available titles.
To play a song, tap it to display the title and track
information.
䡲 To listen to a song or playlist, tap it to begin
playing from the selected song. (You can also
highlight the playlist to begin listening.)
䡲

SPH-D700.book Page 207 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

4. Confirm the song has been successfully assigned

1. Press

and tap
>
> Songs. Your
device searches through your device and microSD
card for compatible music files and then displays
them onscreen.

2. Touch and hold a song you’d like to add to a
playlist. This action reveals an onscreen context
menu.

3. Tap Add to playlist and select either a Current
playlist or select New (to create a new playlist).
䡲

If you select New, delete the current default name,
enter a name for your new playlist, and tap Save.

and tap

>

5. Confirm the new song is selected.

Backing Up Your Downloaded Music Files
Sprint recommends you back up your downloaded
music files to your computer. (See “Connecting Your
Device to Your Computer” on page 125.)

1. Connect your phone using a USB cable or the
built-in connection on Bluetooth-enabled phones.

2. Use your computer to navigate to the microSD

Assigning a Song as a Ringtone
1. Press

by navigating to your Phone ringtone menu.
Press
>
and tap
> Sound &
display > Phone ringtone.

䡲

TV and Music

Creating a Playlist

> Songs.

2. Touch and hold a song you’d like to use as your
new ringtone. This action reveals an onscreen
popup menu.

card’s Music folder.

3. Select and copy the music files to a folder on your
computer’s hard drive.

3. Tap Use as phone ringtone to store the selected
song as your new default ringtone.

3C. Entertainment: TV and Music

207

SPH-D700.book Page 208 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Streaming Music

YouTube

Sprint offers a variety of musical options through the
Radio category in the Sprint TV menu, including
SIRIUS Music, Music Choice, VH1, and many others.
Choose from rock, pop, hip-hop, and R&B, and access
exclusive video clips, music industry news,
performances, and interviews with your favorite artists.

YouTube™ is a video sharing website on which users
can upload and share videos. The site is used to
display a wide variety of user-generated video content,
including movie clips, TV clips, and music videos, as
well as video content such as video blogging,
informational shorts and other original videos.

1. Press

and tap

>

> Radio >

[selection].

2. Select Preview to see and hear a preview of your

Note: YouTube is a data-intensive feature. Sprint recommends
that you upgrade to an unlimited data plan to avoid
additional data charges.

selected channel (if available).

1. Press

– or –

2. Read the disclaimer regarding data usage and

Select Subscribe to purchase a monthly
subscription to your selected channel.

3. Press

Once you have purchased access to a music or radio
channel, you can select from a variety of stations to
listen to your favorite music or get caught up on what’s
new in music.

and tap

(YouTube) .

touch Continue.
to open the onscreen keyboard, or
open the Qwerty keyboard and tap the Search field
to search for specific videos, scroll down to browse
through the main page thumbnails, or scroll to the
bottom to explore additional options.

4. To view a video, touch an available preview
thumbnail or touch the title link.

5. Press
208

3C. Entertainment: TV and Music

to return to the previous page.

SPH-D700.book Page 209 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

content. However, if you wish to sign in to access
additional options, access the page via the Web
browser and tap Sign in at the top right corner, enter
your YouTube or Google username and password, and
tap Sign in.

䡲

䡲

Note: Wi-Fi will need to be enabled and active on your Epic
4G to use this feature.

The application contains three separate streaming
media options:
䡲 Play file from my phone on another player allows
you to play local device content on a Wi-Fi
capable TV or playback device. The Epic 4G can
then be used as a remote to control playback.

Play file from server on another player via my phone

allows you to “piggy-back” content playback on
an external Wi-Fi TV/receiver. Your Epic 4G
retrieves content from an external wireless source
(eg., server) and pushes it through to an external
wireless destination (eg., TV). The Epic 4G acts to
both route the media and control its playback (as
a remote).

AllShare
Allows users to share their in-device media content
with other external devices using DLNA certified™
(Digital Living Network Alliance) Devices. These
external devices must also be DLNA-compliant.
Wi-Fi capability can be provided to TVs via a device
like the WMG-160 HD Digital Multimedia Streamer.

Play file from server on my phone allows you to
receive and playback media stored externally
(server, laptop, etc.) directly on your device.

TV and Music

Note: It is not necessary to sign in to the YouTube site to view

Configure the AllShare Settings
The AllShare™ application must first be configured
prior to its initial use. You must setup parameters such
as connected Wi-FI, Items to share, source server
address, and external device acceptance rights.

1. Press

and tap

>

(AllShare).

2. Tap Settings and configure the following settings
as desired:
䡲

Media server name allows you to enter the name

of the server transmitting the media files. Eg.,
MyServer. Once you enter the name tap Save.

3C. Entertainment: TV and Music

209

SPH-D700.book Page 210 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

䡲

䡲

Share media to configure which media types will
be shared. Choose from Share video, Share image,
or Share sound.
Access point network allows you to turn on your

Wi-Fi functionality and connect to an available
Wi-Fi Access Point.
Note: It is recommended that if you are not already
communicating with an external WAP, you configure
those settings here first.
䡲

Upload from other devices allows you to setup an

acceptance rule of incoming media from other
external devices. Choose from Always accept,
Always ask, or Always reject and tap OK.

3. Press

to return to the previous page.

Selecting the Media You will Transmit
1. Press

and tap

>

.

2. Tap

adjacent to one of the selected
transmission methods. (This procedure assumes
selection of the first option).

210

3C. Entertainment: TV and Music

3. If transmitting local media to an external device,
scroll through your microSD card folders to locate
the file(s) you wish to transmit. A green checkmark
indicates the file has been selected.

4. Tap Add to playlist. The Epic 4G then begins to
search to compatible Wi-Fi devices.

5. Tap a destination device from the onscreen list. If
you desired device does not appear, tap Refresh.

Receiving Media From a Server
1. Press

and tap

>

.

2. Tap

adjacent to one of the selected
transmission methods. (This procedure assumes
selection of the second option.)

3. Tap a source media server from the onscreen list. If
you server does not appear, tap Refresh.

SPH-D700.book Page 211 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Note: Enabling the GPS hardware can drain your battery
faster.

3D. GPS Navigation

Activating Using Wireless Networks
GPS Services (page 211)

⽧

Google Maps (page 211)

⽧

Sprint Navigation (page 213)

⽧

Getting Driving Directions (page 214)

This additional location feature uses open Wi-Fi and
mobile network connections to assist in providing
additional location accuracy.

1. Press

>
and tap
security > Use wireless networks.

䡲

GPS Services
Your device’s built-in GPS capability gives you access
to a number of location-based services, including
Google Maps and Sprint Navigation.

Activating Location Mode
Before using any of the location-based services, you
must turn on your device’s location mode.
䊳

Press
>
and tap
security > Use GPS satellites.

> Location &

> Location &

Since this feature is based on Google’s location
service, you will need to agree to allow Google to
collect anonymous information.

2. Tap Agree to accept the terms of service.

Google Maps
Use this application to find directions, location
information, business addresses, etc., all right from your
Epic 4G. Determine your current location with or
without GPS, get driving and transit directions and get
phone numbers and addresses for local businesses.

3D. GPS Navigation

211

GPS Navigation

⽧

SPH-D700.book Page 212 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Before you begin using this feature you must activate
your GPS hardware and agree to share location
information with Google.

To use Google Maps:

1. Press

To enable your device’s GPS Location feature:

1. Press

>

and tap

> Location &

security.

2. Tap Use GPS satellites. A green checkmark
indicates the GPS location feature is enabled.
(For additional location information, see “Location
Settings” on page 72.)
䡲
appears in the Notification area when the
GPS is active.
appears in the Notification area when the

䡲

GPS is communicating.

212

Press

and tap

3D. GPS Navigation

>

䡲

.

If prompted, read the
What’s new message
and tap OK.

2. Tap the magnification
icons to zoom in or out of
the current map view.
– or –
to use other
Press
Google Map features.
䡲 Choose from: Search, Directions, Layers,
My Location, Join Latitude, and More.
To search for a keyword:

To launch the Google Maps application:
䊳

and tap
>

(Maps).

1. Press

and tap

2. Press

and tap Search.

>

.

SPH-D700.book Page 213 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

a keyword, and tap
.
䡲 This keyword can be a category name (such as
pizza, steak, burger), a business name (Samsung,
Sprint), or a Google friend who is sharing their
location.

4. Tap

(bottom left) to reveal a detailed list of
information corresponding to those matches now
displayed on your screen with lettered pins.

Sprint Navigation
Sprint Navigation gives you turn-by-turn directions
onscreen and over speakerphone.
Note: Depending on your service plan, Sprint Navigation may
require a monthly subscription. Contact Sprint for
information and pricing.

Note: Some features may be available only with a

Registering Sprint Navigation
Before you can use Sprint Navigation, your device and
service must be registered.

1. Press

and tap

>

(Sprint

Navigation).

2. Read the disclaimer and touch Accept to
acknowledge the terms of use.

3. Tap each of the onscreen registration fields and
enter the required information.
First Name, Last Name, and Email (optional).
䡲 If using the onscreen keyboard, tap Next to store
your information.
䡲

4. Tap Continue to register your information.
5. Tap Yes to take a brief tour of the Navigation
features and functionality, or No, Skip Tour to
continue to the main navigation screen.

GPS Navigation

3. Tap the search field (at the top of the screen), enter

subscription to Sprint Navigation Premium.

3D. GPS Navigation

213

SPH-D700.book Page 214 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Using Sprint Navigation

●

previously entered Contacts.

Before you can use Sprint Navigation, your device and
service must be registered.

1. Press

and tap

>

䡲

Search lets you search for locations from dozens
of options such as Food/Coffee, Gas Stations, Gas
by Price, Banks/ATMs, WiFi Spots, Parking Lots,
Hotels & Motels, Movie Theaters, etc.

䡲

Maps & Traffic provides access to a 2D map of

.

2. Select an option and follow the onscreen
instructions to take advantage of Sprint
Navigation’s full suite of features.
䡲 Drive To lets you get driving directions from
wherever you are to wherever you’re going.
Choices include:
● My Favorites: user-defined favorite locations.
● Recent Places: recently entered locations.
● Address: manually entered street addresses.
● Intersection: map based on manually a
entered street intersection.
● City: display a city map based on selected city.
● Business: locations based on business
categories.
● Airports: local airports based on current GPS
location.

214

3D. GPS Navigation

Contacts: those local addresses assigned to

your current location, access to real-time traffic
information, and other additional features.
䡲 Share & More offers additional options, such as
sharing your location with contacts, creating and
storing My Favorites locations, accessing the
product tour, looking for movies and movie
theaters, and setting detailed application
preferences.
Note: For more information about Sprint Navigation, visit
www.sprint.com/navigation.

Getting Driving Directions
The built-in GPS hardware (when enabled) allows you
to get driving directions to selected locations or
establishments based on your current location.

SPH-D700.book Page 215 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Using a Physical Address
Before you can use Sprint Navigation, your device and
service must be registered.

1. Press

and tap

>

> Drive To >

After you enter the location and receive driving
directions, you can alter the information being
displayed by using one of three other driving options:
Traffic, Summary, and Search.
Distance to next turn

Address.

2. Tap Type It to manually enter the new address and
receive driving directions from the GPS network.

Magnifications

Tap Speak It to place a call to the TeleNav™
operator where you will speak the desired address.
This is similar to calling 411 for directory
assistance. (A fee may be incurred.)

3. Tap Address and then enter information (Address,
City, State/ZIP, and Country) into any of the address
fields.

No GPS
signal

GPS Navigation

– or –

3D map

Scale

4. Tap Done > Get Route to initiate your search. If
prompted to select from a list of matches, tap the
correct address.

5. Follow both the onscreen and audio directions.

Current Street
location

Your location

3D. GPS Navigation

215

SPH-D700.book Page 216 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Using a Local Business Category

To receive turn by turn directions (2D):

1. Press

and tap

>

> Drive To >

Address.
Note: A 2D map is a flat representation f your projected
driving directions. A 3D map represents the driving
directions with a representation of depth.

2. Tap Type It, enter the physical address information,
and tap Done.
and tap Summary to receive a
detailed turn by turn description for navigating to
your desired location.

To search nearby locations based on type:
and tap

>

> Drive To >

Address.

2. Tap Type It, enter the physical address information,
and tap Done.

3. Press

and tap Search to search for a
location based on a category such as Food/
Coffee, etc.

216

3D. GPS Navigation

1. Press

and tap

>

> Drive To >

Businesses.

2. Tap Type It, enter the physical address information,

3. Press

1. Press

The Epic 4G can also cross-reference your current
location with local business and points of interest, such
as Grocery Stores, Gas Stations, Wi-Fi Spots, Malls,
Hospitals, etc.

and tap Done.

3. Tap the Category field and then choose from one
of the available category entries by touching an
onscreen entry such as: Food/Coffee, Gas Stations,
Gas by Price, Banks/ATMs, WiFi Spots, Hospitals,
etc..
– or –
Enter a keyword into the Where field to begin
retrieving matches. Once you see a matching
business name, touch the entry.
● Entries with more than one available category
(a subcategory) appear with an adjacent gray
arrow. These entries can be expanded and
then closed.

SPH-D700.book Page 217 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

search.

1. Press

5. Tap a matching entry based on star ratings and
distances.
To search for the nearest gas station in your area:

1. Press

To create a My Favorites location from a Recent Place:

and tap

>
> Drive To >
Businesses > Category > Gas Stations.

2. Tap Search to begin the search.
3. Touch an entry from the list to display a new route
to the selected gas station.

Creating a My Favorites
Location
Once you have begun using
Sprint Navigation to find your
destination, you can then either
recall those locations and add
them to your list of favorite
destinations or create a new
entry from one of the available
location categories (Address,
Business, Airport, or Contacts).

and tap

>

> Drive To >

Recent Places.

2. Use the directional arrow keys to highlight a recent
place from the list.

3. Press
䡲

and tap Save as Favorite.

Save as Favorite: to save the current location to

your My Favorites list.

Sharing a Recent Location with Others
Recently queried locations can be saved to your My
Favorites list and also shared with other cellular
devices.

1. Press

and tap

>

GPS Navigation

4. Tap Search to store your information and begin the

> Drive To >

Recent Places.

2. Use the directional arrow keys to highlight a recent
place from the list.

3. Press

and tap Share Address.

4. Tap the Send To: field and then enter a mobile
number or email address.

3D. GPS Navigation

217

SPH-D700.book Page 218 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

5. Tap Send Now to complete the delivery process.

Configuring Your Navigation Preferences
1. Press

and tap

>
Share & More > Preferences.

●

Connection: allows you to assign the GPS
connection method: BIS, MDS(BES), or TCP.
Default is BIS.

Note: It is recommended you do not alter the Connection
method unless there is an functional issue with the
application.

General: allows change general settings,

including:
●

●

●

●

●

218

Tips: allows you to display onscreen tips:
Always On or Always Off.

>

2. Touch an entry to change its current setting:
䡲

●

First Name/Last Name: allows you to alter the

current first and last name registered with the
service, as well as email address.
Email: allows you to create an associated
email account for this application.
Region: allows you to assign a current region.
Default is North America.
Language: allows you to assign a current
language. Default is English(US).
Distance Units: allows you to alter the
descriptions used for distances: Km/Meters or
Mi/Ft.

3D. GPS Navigation

●

●

●

●

GPS Source: allows you to assign a current
GPS connection source. Default is Internal.
Exit after (minutes): assigns the default
application timeout. This is the timeout interval
when no activity is detected: Never, 5, 10, 20,
or 30.
Init Volume: allows you to alter the initial
volume level for the readouts: Very Soft, Soft,
Normal, Loud, or Very Loud.
Map Colors: allows you to alter the
appearance of the onscreen map: Daytime,
Nightime, or Auto.

SPH-D700.book Page 219 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Navigation: lets you change navigation settings,

●

Language: allows you to select the language
used for the directions when spoken: Sara
(English US) (default) or Maria (Spanish).

●

During Phone Call: allows you to setup if
directions are spoken during a phone call:
Suspend (default) or Play.

including:
Route Style: allows you to choose the method
which is used to provide you directions from
Point A to Point B. The default is Always use
fastest.
● Avoid: allows you to setup obstacles that
should be avoided when determining travel
routes: HOV Lanes, Tools, and Traffic Delays.
Tap Done to set these parameters.
● Moving Maps: allows you to setup a preferred
traffic display view: 2D Maps or 3D Maps
(default).
● Backlight: allows you to assign the backlight
settings: On, Off, or On at Turns.
● Traffic Alerts: allows you to setup a traffic alert
notification when these appear on your
current travel route. Choose from On or Off.
䡲 Navigation Audio: lets you change the audio read
out given during your navigation session:
● Settings: allows you to setup the level of detail
used for the directions when spoken: Full
Audio, Instructions Only, or No Audio.
●

Launching the Product Tour
1. Press

and tap
>
Share & More > Product Tour.

>

GPS Navigation

䡲

3D. GPS Navigation

219

SPH-D700.book Page 220 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

SPH-D700.book Page 221 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Section 4

Safety and Warranty
Information

SPH-D700.book Page 222 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

4A. Important Safety
Information
⽧

General Precautions (page 222)

⽧

Maintaining Safe Use of and Access to Your Phone
(page 223)

⽧

Caring for the Battery (page 224)

⽧

Radio Frequency (RF) Energy (page 225)

⽧

Owner’s Record (page 227)

⽧

User Guide Proprietary Notice (page 228)

This phone guide contains important operational and
safety information that will help you safely use your
phone. Failure to read and follow the information

provided in this phone guide may result in serious
bodily injury, death, or property damage.

222

4A. Important Safety Information

General Precautions
There are several simple guidelines to operating your phone
properly and maintaining safe, satisfactory service.
䢇 To maximize performance, do not touch the bottom portion
of your phone where the internal antenna is located while
using the phone.
䢇 Speak directly into the mouthpiece.
䢇 Avoid exposing your phone and accessories to rain or liquid
spills. If your phone does get wet, immediately turn the
power off and remove the battery.
䢇 Do not expose your phone to direct sunlight for extended
periods of time (such as on the dashboard of a car).
䢇 Although your phone is quite sturdy, it is a complex piece of
equipment and can be broken. Avoid dropping, hitting,
bending, or sitting on it.
䢇 Any changes or modifications to your phone not expressly
approved in this document could void your warranty for this
equipment and void your authority to operate this
equipment.
Note: For the best care of your phone, only Sprint-authorized
personnel should service your phone and accessories. Failure
to do so may be dangerous and void your warranty.

SPH-D700.book Page 223 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Do Not Rely on Your Phone for Emergency Calls

Using Your Phone Near Other Electronic Devices
Most modern electronic equipment is shielded from radio
frequency (RF) signals. However, RF signals from wireless
phones may affect inadequately shielded electronic
equipment.

Mobile phones operate using radio signals, which cannot
guarantee connection in all conditions. Therefore you should
never rely solely upon any mobile phone for essential
communication (e.g., medical emergencies). Emergency calls
may not be possible on all cellular networks or when certain
network services or mobile phone features are in use. Check
with your local service provider for details.

RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately
shielded electronic operating systems or entertainment
systems in motor vehicles. Check with the manufacturer or their
representative to determine if these systems are adequately
shielded from external RF signals. Also check with the
manufacturer regarding any equipment that has been added to
your vehicle.

Using Your Phone While Driving

Consult the manufacturer of any personal medical devices,
such as pacemakers and hearing aids, to determine if they are
adequately shielded from external RF signals.

Talking on your phone while driving (or operating the phone
without a hands-free device) is prohibited in some jurisdictions.
Laws vary as to specific restrictions. Remember that safety
always comes first.
Tip: Purchase an optional hands-free accessory at your local Sprint
Store, or call Sprint at 1-866-866-7509. You can also dial # 2 2 2
on your phone.

Following Safety Guidelines
To operate your phone safely and efficiently, always follow any
special regulations in a given area. Turn your phone off in areas
where use is forbidden or when it may cause interference or
danger.

Note: Always turn off the phone in healthcare facilities, and request
permission before using the phone near medical equipment.

Turning Off Your Phone Before Flying
Turn off your phone before boarding any aircraft. To prevent
possible interference with aircraft systems, the U.S. Federal
Aviation Administration (FAA) regulations require you to have
permission from a crew member to use your phone while
the plane is on the ground. To prevent any risk of interference,
FCC regulations prohibit using your phone while the plane is in
the air.

4A. Important Safety Information

Important Safety Information

Maintaining Safe Use of and Access
to Your Phone

223

SPH-D700.book Page 224 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Turning Off Your Phone in Dangerous Areas
To avoid interfering with blasting operations, turn your phone
off when in a blasting area or in other areas with signs
indicating two-way radios should be turned off. Construction
crews often use remote-control RF devices to set off explosives.
Turn your phone off when you’re in any area that has a
potentially explosive atmosphere. Although it’s rare, your phone
and accessories could generate sparks. Sparks can cause an
explosion or fire, resulting in bodily injury or even death. These
areas are often, but not always, clearly marked. They include:
䡲 Fueling areas such as gas stations.
䡲 Below deck on boats.
䡲 Fuel or chemical transfer or storage facilities.
䡲 Areas where the air contains chemicals or particles such
as grain, dust, or metal powders.
䡲 Any other area where you would normally be advised to
turn off your vehicle’s engine.
Note: Never transport or store flammable gas, flammable liquids, or
explosives in the compartment of your vehicle that contains
your phone or accessories.

Restricting Children’s Access to Your Phone
Your phone is not a toy. Do not allow children to play with it as
they could hurt themselves and others, damage the phone or
make calls that increase your Sprint invoice.

224

4A. Important Safety Information

Please Note the Following Information When Using Your
Handset
1. WARNING REGARDING DISPLAY
䡲

The display on your handset is made of glass or acrylic
and could break if your handset is dropped or if it
receives significant impact. Do not use if screen is broken
or cracked as this could cause injury to you.

2. WARRANTY DISCLAIMER: PROPER USE OF A
TOUCHSCREEN HANDSET
䡲

If your handset has a touchscreen display, please note
that a touchscreen responds best to a light touch from
the pad of your finger or a non-metallic stylus. Using
excessive force or a metallic object when pressing on the
touchscreen may damage the tempered glass surface
and void the warranty. For more information, please refer
to the “4B. Manufacturer’s Warranty” on page 229.

Caring for the Battery
Protecting Your Battery
The guidelines listed below help you get the most out of your
battery’s performance.
䢇 Recently there have been some public reports of wireless
phone batteries overheating, catching fire, or exploding. It
appears that many, if not all, of these reports involve
counterfeit or inexpensive, aftermarket-brand batteries with
unknown or questionable manufacturing standards. Sprint is

SPH-D700.book Page 225 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

䢇
䢇
䢇
䢇
䢇
䢇

䢇

Disposal of Lithium Ion (Li-Ion) Batteries
Do not handle a damaged or leaking Li-Ion battery as you can
be burned.
For safe disposal options of your Li-Ion batteries, contact your
nearest Sprint authorized service center.
Special Note: Be sure to dispose of your battery properly. In
some areas, the disposal of batteries in household or business
trash may be prohibited.

Radio Frequency (RF) Energy
Understanding How Your Phone Operates
Your phone is basically a radio transmitter and receiver. When
it’s turned on, it receives and transmits radio frequency (RF)
signals. When you use your phone, the system handling your
call controls the power level. This power can range from 0.006
watt to 0.2 watt in digital mode.

Knowing Radio Frequency Safety
The design of your phone complies with updated NCRP
standards described below.
In 1991–92, the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
(IEEE) and the American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
joined in updating ANSI’s 1982 standard for safety levels with
respect to human exposure to RF signals. More than 120
scientists, engineers and physicians from universities,
government health agencies and industries developed this

4A. Important Safety Information

Important Safety Information

䢇

not aware of similar problems with Sprint phones resulting
from the proper use of batteries and accessories approved
by Sprint or the manufacturer of your phone. Use only Sprintapproved or manufacturer-approved batteries and
accessories found at Sprint Stores or through your phone’s
manufacturer, or call 1-866-866-7509 to order. They’re also
available at www.sprint.com — click Accessories. Buying the
right batteries and accessories is the best way to ensure
they’re genuine and safe.
In order to avoid damage, charge the battery only in
temperatures that range from 32° F to 113° F (0° C to 45° C).
Don’t use the battery charger in direct sunlight or in high
humidity areas, such as the bathroom.
Never dispose of the battery by incineration.
Keep the metal contacts on top of the battery clean.
Don’t attempt to disassemble or short-circuit the battery.
The battery may need recharging if it has not been used for
a long period of time.
It’s best to replace the battery when it no longer provides
acceptable performance. It can be recharged hundreds of
times before it needs replacing.
Don’t store the battery in high temperature areas for long
periods of time. It’s best to follow these storage rules:
䡲 Less than one month:
-4° F to 140° F (-20° C to 60° C)
䡲 More than one month:
-4° F to 113° F (-20° C to 45° C)

225

SPH-D700.book Page 226 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

updated standard after reviewing the available body of
research. In 1993, the Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) adopted this updated standard in a regulation. In August
1996, the FCC adopted hybrid standard consisting of the
existing ANSI/IEEE standard and the guidelines published by
the National Council of Radiation Protection and
Measurements (NCRP).

Body-Worn Operation
To maintain compliance with FCC RF exposure guidelines, if
you wear a handset on your body, use a Sprint-supplied or
Sprint-approved carrying case, holster or other body-worn
accessory. If you do not use a body-worn accessory, ensure
the antenna is at least 7/16 inch (1.5 centimeters) from your
body when transmitting. Use of non-Sprint-approved
accessories may violate FCC RF exposure guidelines.
For more information about RF exposure, visit the FCC website
at www.fcc.gov.

Specific Absorption Rates (SAR) for Wireless
Phones

the level reported to the FCC. This is because of a variety of
factors including its proximity to a base station antenna, phone
design and other factors. What is important to remember is that
each phone meets strict federal guidelines. Variations in SARs
do not represent a variation in safety.
All phones must meet the federal standard, which incorporates
a substantial margin of safety. As stated above, variations in
SAR values between different model phones do not mean
variations in safety. SAR values at or below the federal standard
of 1.6 W/kg are considered safe for use by the public.
The highest reported SAR values of the SPH-D700 are:
Cellular CDMA mode (Part 22):
Head: 0.68 W/kg; Body-worn: 0.99 W/kg
PCS mode (Part 24):
Head: 0.44 W/kg; Body-worn: 0.77 W/kg
4G:
Body-worn: 0.53 W/kg

FCC Radio Frequency Emission

The SAR value corresponds to the relative amount of RF
energy absorbed into the head of a user of a wireless handset.

This phone meets the FCC Radio Frequency Emission
Guidelines.

The SAR value of a phone is the result of an extensive testing,
measuring and calculation process. It does not represent how
much RF the phone emits. All phone models are tested at their
highest value in strict laboratory settings. But when in
operation, the SAR of a phone can be substantially less than

FCC ID number: A3LSPHD700.

226

4A. Important Safety Information

More information on the phone’s SAR can be found from the
following FCC website: http://www.fcc.gov/oet/ea/.

SPH-D700.book Page 227 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation
is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may
not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the
limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the
FCC Rules.

These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference in a residential installation. This
equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications.

䢇
䢇
䢇
䢇

Reorient the direction of the internal antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different
from that to which the receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for
help.

Owner’s Record
The model, regulatory, and serial number are located on a
nameplate inside the battery compartment. Record the serial
number in the space provided below. This is helpful if you need
to contact us about your phone in the future.
Model: Epic 4G™
Serial No.:
Important Safety Information

FCC Notice

However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur
in a particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct
the interference by one or more of the following measures:

4A. Important Safety Information

227

SPH-D700.book Page 228 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

User Guide Proprietary Notice
CDMA Technology is licensed by QUALCOMM Incorporated
under one or more of the following patents:
4,901,307

5,109,390

5,267,262

5,416,797

5,506,865

5,544,196

5,657,420

5,101,501

5,267,261

5,414,796

5,504,773

5,535,239

5,600,754

5,778,338

5,228,054

5,337,338

5,710,784

5,056,109

5,568,483

5,659,569

5,490,165

5,511,073

Note: Pat. 7,295,673; 7,460,688; 7,519,274

T9 Text Input is licensed by Nuance Communications, Inc. and
is covered by U.S. Pat. 5,818,437, U.S. Pat. 5,953,541, U.S. Pat.
6,011,554 and other patents pending.
User Guide template version 9a_FM (April 2009)

228

4A. Important Safety Information

SPH-D700.book Page 229 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

4B. Manufacturer’s Warranty
⽧

Manufacturer’s Warranty (page 229)

Your phone has been designed to provide you with
reliable, worry-free service. If for any reason you have a
problem with your equipment, please refer to the
manufacturer’s warranty in this section.
For information regarding the terms and conditions of
service for your phone, please visit www.sprint.com or
call Sprint Customer Service at 1-888-211-4727.
Note: In addition to the warranty provided by your phone’s
manufacturer, which is detailed on the following pages, Sprint
offers a number of optional plans to cover your equipment for
non-warranty claims. Sprint Total Equipment Protection
provides the combined coverage of the Sprint Equipment
Replacement Program and the Sprint Equipment Service
and Repair Program, both of which are available separately.
Each of these programs may be signed up for within 30 days
of activating your phone. For more details, please visit your
nearest Sprint Store or call Sprint at 1-800-584-3666.

STANDARD LIMITED WARRANTY
What is Covered and For How Long?
SAMSUNG TELECOMMUNICATIONS AMERICA, LLC
("SAMSUNG") warrants to the original purchaser ("Purchaser")
that SAMSUNG's phones and accessories ("Products") are free
from defects in material and workmanship under normal use
and service for the period commencing upon the date of
purchase and continuing for the following specified period of
time after that date:

Phone

Warranty

Manufacturer’s Warranty

1 Year

Batteries

1 Year

Leather Case

90 Days

Other Phone Accessories

1 Year

What is Not Covered?
This Limited Warranty is conditioned upon proper use of
Product by Purchaser. This Limited Warranty does not cover:
(a) defects or damage resulting from accident, misuse,
abnormal use, abnormal conditions, improper storage,
exposure to moisture or dampness, neglect, unusual physical,
electrical or electromechanical stress, or defects in
appearance, cosmetic, decorative or structural items, including
framing, and any non-operative parts unless caused by
SAMSUNG; (b) defects or damage resulting from excessive

4B. Manufacturer’s Warranty

229

SPH-D700.book Page 230 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

force or use of a metallic object when pressing on a
touchscreen; (c) equipment that has the serial number or the
enhancement data code removed, defaced, damaged, altered
or made illegible; (d) any plastic surfaces or other externally
exposed parts that are scratched or damaged due to normal
use; (e) malfunctions resulting from the use of Product in
conjunction or connection with accessories, products, or
ancillary/peripheral equipment not furnished or approved by
SAMSUNG; (f) defects or damage from improper testing,
operation, maintenance, installation, service, or adjustment not
furnished or approved by SAMSUNG; (g) defects or damage
from external causes such as collision with an object, or from
fire, flooding, sand, dirt, windstorm, lightning, earthquake, or
from exposure to weather conditions, or battery leakage, theft,
blown fuse, or improper use of any electrical source; (h) defects
or damage caused by cellular signal reception or transmission,
or viruses or other software problems introduced into the
Product; (i) any other acts which are not the fault of SAMSUNG;
or (j) Product used or purchased outside the United States.
This Limited Warranty covers batteries only if battery capacity
falls below 80% of rated capacity or the battery leaks, and this
Limited Warranty does not cover any battery if (i) the battery
has been charged by a battery charger not specified or
approved by SAMSUNG for charging the battery, (ii) any of the
seals on the battery are broken or show evidence of tampering,
or (iii) the battery has been used in equipment other than the
SAMSUNG phone for which it is specified.

230

4B. Manufacturer’s Warranty

What are SAMSUNG's Obligations?
During the applicable warranty period, SAMSUNG will repair or
replace, at SAMSUNG's sole option, without charge to
Purchaser, any defective component part of Product. To obtain
service under this Limited Warranty, Purchaser must return
Product to an authorized phone service facility in an adequate
container for shipping, accompanied by Purchaser's sales
receipt or comparable substitute proof of sale showing the
original date of purchase, the serial number of Product and the
sellers' name and address. To obtain assistance on where to
deliver the Product, call Samsung Customer Care at 1-888987-4357. Upon receipt, SAMSUNG will promptly repair or
replace the defective Product. SAMSUNG may, at SAMSUNG's
sole option, use rebuilt, reconditioned, or new parts or
components when repairing any Product or replace Product
with a rebuilt, reconditioned or new Product. Repaired/replaced
cases, pouches and holsters will be warranted for a period of
ninety (90) days. All other repaired/replaced Product will be
warranted for a period equal to the remainder of the original
Limited Warranty on the original Product or for 90 days,
whichever is longer. All replaced parts, components, boards
and equipment shall become the property of SAMSUNG. If
SAMSUNG determines that any Product is not covered by this
Limited Warranty, Purchaser must pay all parts, shipping, and
labor charges for the repair or return of such Product.

What Are The Limits On Samsung's Warranty/liability?
SET FORTH IN THE EXPRESS WARRANTY CONTAINED
HEREIN, PURCHASER TAKES THE PRODUCT "AS IS," AND
SAMSUNG MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION
AND THERE ARE NO CONDITIONS, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE, OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER
WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO:
䢇 THE MERCHANTABILITY OF THE PRODUCT OR ITS
FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR USE;
䢇 WARRANTIES OF TITLE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT;
䢇 DESIGN, CONDITION, QUALITY, OR PERFORMANCE OF
THE PRODUCT;
䢇 THE WORKMANSHIP OF THE PRODUCT OR THE
COMPONENTS CONTAINED THEREIN; OR
䢇 COMPLIANCE OF THE PRODUCT WITH THE
REQUIREMENTS OF ANY LAW, RULE, SPECIFICATION OR
CONTRACT PERTAINING THERETO.
NOTHING CONTAINED IN THE INSTRUCTION MANUAL SHALL
BE CONSTRUED TO CREATE AN EXPRESS WARRANTY OF
ANY KIND WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT.
ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS THAT MAY
ARISE BY OPERATION OF LAW, INCLUDING IF APPLICABLE
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE HEREBY
LIMITED TO THE SAME DURATION OF TIME AS THE EXPRESS
WRITTEN WARRANTY STATED HEREIN. SOME STATES DO
NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED

WARRANTY LASTS, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT
APPLY TO YOU. IN ADDITION, SAMSUNG SHALL NOT BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND RESULTING FROM
THE PURCHASE, USE, OR MISUSE OF, OR INABILITY TO USE
THE PRODUCT OR ARISING DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY FROM
THE USE OR LOSS OF USE OF THE PRODUCT OR FROM THE
BREACH OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTY, INCLUDING
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR SIMILAR
DAMAGES, OR LOSS OF ANTICIPATED PROFITS OR
BENEFITS, OR FOR DAMAGES ARISING FROM ANY TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR GROSS NEGLIGENCE) OR
FAULT COMMITTED BY SAMSUNG, ITS AGENTS OR
EMPLOYEES, OR FOR ANY BREACH OF CONTRACT OR FOR
ANY CLAIM BROUGHT AGAINST PURCHASER BY ANY
OTHER PARTY. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE
EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR
EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.

Warranty

SPH-D700.book Page 231 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, AND
YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS, WHICH VARY FROM
STATE TO STATE. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY SHALL NOT
EXTEND TO ANYONE OTHER THAN THE ORIGINAL
PURCHASER OF THIS PRODUCT AND STATES PURCHASER'S
EXCLUSIVE REMEDY. IF ANY PORTION OF THIS LIMITED
WARRANTY IS HELD ILLEGAL OR UNENFORCEABLE BY
REASON OF ANY LAW, SUCH PARTIAL ILLEGALITY OR
UNENFORCEABILITY SHALL NOT AFFECT THE
ENFORCEABILITY FOR THE REMAINDER OF THIS LIMITED

4B. Manufacturer’s Warranty

231

SPH-D700.book Page 232 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

WARRANTY WHICH PURCHASER ACKNOWLEDGES IS AND
WILL ALWAYS BE CONSTRUED TO BE LIMITED BY ITS TERMS
OR AS LIMITED AS THE LAW PERMITS.

statements such as dealer advertising or presentation, whether
oral or written, do not constitute warranties by SAMSUNG and
should not be relied upon.

THE PARTIES UNDERSTAND THAT THE PURCHASER MAY
USE THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT IN
CONJUNCTION WITH THE PRODUCT. SAMSUNG MAKES NO
WARRANTIES OR REPRESENTATIONS AND THERE ARE NO
CONDITIONS, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, STATUTORY OR
OTHERWISE, AS TO THE QUALITY, CAPABILITIES,
OPERATIONS, PERFORMANCE OR SUITABILITY OF ANY
THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT, WHETHER SUCH
THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT IS INCLUDED
WITH THE PRODUCT DISTRIBUTED BY SAMSUNG OR
OTHERWISE, INCLUDING THE ABILITY TO INTEGRATE ANY
SUCH SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT WITH THE PRODUCT.
THE QUALITY, CAPABILITIES, OPERATIONS, PERFORMANCE
AND SUITABILITY OF ANY SUCH THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE
OR EQUIPMENT LIE SOLELY WITH THE PURCHASER AND
THE DIRECT VENDOR, OWNER OR SUPPLIER OF SUCH
THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT, AS THE CASE
MAY BE.

Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC

This Limited Warranty allocates risk of Product failure between
Purchaser and SAMSUNG, and SAMSUNG's Product pricing
reflects this allocation of risk and the limitations of liability
contained in this Limited Warranty. The agents, employees,
distributors, and dealers of SAMSUNG are not authorized to
make modifications to this Limited Warranty, or make additional
warranties binding on SAMSUNG. Accordingly, additional

232

4B. Manufacturer’s Warranty

1301 E. Lookout Drive
Richardson, Texas 75082
Phone: 1-800-SAMSUNG
Phone: 1-888-987-HELP (4357)
©2010 Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC. All rights
reserved.
No reproduction in whole or in part allowed without prior
written approval. Specifications and availability subject to
change without notice. [021710]

End User License Agreement for Software
IMPORTANT. READ CAREFULLY: This End User License
Agreement ("EULA") is a legal agreement between you (either
an individual or a single entity) and Samsung Electronics Co.,
Ltd. for software owned by Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. and
its affiliated companies and its third party suppliers and
licensors that accompanies this EULA, which includes
computer software and may include associated media, printed
materials, "online" or electronic documentation ("Software").
BY CLICKING THE "I ACCEPT" BUTTON (OR IF YOU BYPASS
OR OTHERWISE DISABLE THE "I ACCEPT", AND STILL
INSTALL, COPY, DOWNLOAD, ACCESS OR OTHERWISE USE

SPH-D700.book Page 233 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

1. GRANT OF LICENSE. Samsung grants you the following
rights provided that you comply with all terms and conditions of
this EULA: You may install, use, access, display and run one
copy of the Software on the local hard disk(s) or other
permanent storage media of one computer and use the
Software on a single computer or a mobile device at a time,
and you may not make the Software available over a network
where it could be used by multiple computers at the same
time. You may make one copy of the Software in machinereadable form for backup purposes only; provided that the
backup copy must include all copyright or other proprietary
notices contained on the original.
2. RESERVATION OF RIGHTS AND OWNERSHIP. Samsung
reserves all rights not expressly granted to you in this EULA.
The Software is protected by copyright and other intellectual
property laws and treaties. Samsung or its suppliers own the
title, copyright and other intellectual property rights in the
Software. The Software is licensed, not sold.
3. LIMITATIONS ON END USER RIGHTS. You may not reverse
engineer, decompile, disassemble, or otherwise attempt to
discover the source code or algorithms of, the Software (except
and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted
by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation), or modify, or
disable any features of, the Software, or create derivative works

based on the Software. You may not rent, lease, lend,
sublicense or provide commercial hosting services with the
Software.
4. CONSENT TO USE OF DATA. You agree that Samsung and
its affiliates may collect and use technical information gathered
as part of the product support services related to the Software
provided to you, if any, related to the Software. Samsung may
use this information solely to improve its products or to provide
customized services or technologies to you and will not
disclose this information in a form that personally identifies you.

Warranty

THE SOFTWARE), YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THE
TERMS OF THIS EULA. IF YOU DO NOT ACCEPT THE TERMS
IN THIS EULA, YOU MUST CLICK THE "DECLINE" BUTTON,
DISCONTINUE USE OF THE SOFTWARE.

5. UPGRADES. This EULA applies to updates, supplements
and add-on components (if any) of the Software that Samsung
may provide to you or make available to you after the date you
obtain your initial copy of the Software, unless we provide other
terms along with such upgrade. To use Software identified as
an upgrade, you must first be licensed for the Software
identified by Samsung as eligible for the upgrade. After
upgrading, you may no longer use the Software that formed the
basis for your upgrade eligibility.
6. SOFTWARE TRANSFER. You may not transfer this EULA or
the rights to the Software granted herein to any third party
unless it is in connection with the sale of the mobile device
which the Software accompanied. In such event, the transfer
must include all of the Software (including all component parts,
the media and printed materials, any upgrades, this EULA) and
you may not retain any copies of the Software. The transfer may
not be an indirect transfer, such as a consignment. Prior to the

4B. Manufacturer’s Warranty

233

SPH-D700.book Page 234 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

transfer, the end user receiving the Software must agree to all
the EULA terms.
7. EXPORT RESTRICTIONS. You acknowledge that the Software
is subject to export restrictions of various countries. You agree
to comply with all applicable international and national laws
that apply to the Software, including the U.S. Export
Administration Regulations, as well as end user, end use, and
destination restrictions issued by U.S. and other governments.
8. TERMINATION. This EULA is effective until terminated. Your
rights under this License will terminate automatically without
notice from Samsung if you fail to comply with any of the terms
and conditions of this EULA. Upon termination of this EULA,
you shall cease all use of the Software and destroy all copies,
full or partial, of the Software.
9. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES. You expressly acknowledge
and agree that use of the Software is at your sole risk and that
the entire risk as to satisfactory quality, performance, accuracy
and effort is with you. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED
BY APPLICABLE LAW, THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS"
AND WITH ALL FAULTS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, AND SAMSUNG AND ITS LICENSORS (COLLECTIVELY
REFERRED TO AS "SAMSUNG" FOR THE PURPOSES OF
SECTIONS 9, 10 and 11) HEREBY DISCLAIM ALL
WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO THE
SOFTWARE, EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES AND/OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY,
OF SATISFACTORY QUALITY OR WORKMANLIKE EFFORT, OF

234

4B. Manufacturer’s Warranty

FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OF RELIABILITY OR
AVAILABILITY, OF ACCURACY, OF LACK OF VIRUSES, OF
QUIET ENJOYMENT, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD
PARTY RIGHTS. SAMSUNG DOES NOT WARRANT AGAINST
INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR ENJOYMENT OF THE
SOFTWARE, THAT THE FUNCTIONS CONTAINED IN THE
SOFTWARE WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS, THAT THE
OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED
OR ERROR-FREE, OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE
WILL BE CORRECTED. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION
OR ADVICE GIVEN BY SAMSUNG OR A SAMSUNG
AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL CREATE A
WARRANTY. SHOULD THE SOFTWARE PROVE DEFECTIVE,
YOU ASSUME THE ENTIRE COST OF ALL NECESSARY
SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. SOME
JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR LIMITATIONS ON APPLICABLE
STATUTORY RIGHTS OF A CONSUMER, SO THESE
EXCLUSIONS AND LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
10. EXCLUSION OF INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL AND
CERTAIN OTHER DAMAGES. TO THE EXTENT NOT
PROHIBITED BY LAW, IN NO EVENT SHALL SAMSUNG BE
LIABLE FOR PERSONAL INJURY, OR ANY INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
WHATSOEVER, OR FOR LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF DATA,
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, OR FOR ANY PECUNIARY
DAMAGES OR LOSSES, ARISING OUT OF OR RELATED TO
YOUR USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE, THE

PROVISION OF OR FAILURE TO PROVIDE SUPPORT OR
OTHER SERVICES, INFORMATION, SOFTWARE, AND
RELATED CONTENT THROUGH THE SOFTWARE OR
OTHERWISE ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF THE SOFTWARE,
OR OTHERWISE UNDER OR IN CONNECTION WITH ANY
PROVISION OF THIS EULA, HOWEVER CAUSED,
REGARDLESS OF THE THEORY OF LIABILITY (CONTRACT,
TORT OR OTHERWISE) AND EVEN IF SAMSUNG HAS BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. SOME
JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE LIMITATION OF
LIABILITY FOR PERSONAL INJURY, OR OF INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THIS LIMITATION MAY NOT
APPLY TO YOU.
11. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. Notwithstanding any damages
that you might incur for any reason whatsoever (including,
without limitation, all damages referenced herein and all direct
or general damages in contract or anything else), the entire
liability of Samsung under any provision of this EULA and your
exclusive remedy hereunder shall be limited to the greater of
the actual damages you incur in reasonable reliance on the
Software up to the amount actually paid by you for the Software
or US$5.00. The foregoing limitations, exclusions and
disclaimers (including Sections 9, 10 and 11) shall apply to the
maximum extent permitted by applicable law, even if any
remedy fails its essential purpose.

12. U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS. The Software is licensed
only with "restricted rights" and as "commercial items"
consisting of "commercial software" and "commercial software
documentation" with only those rights as are granted to all
other end users pursuant to the terms and conditions herein.
13. APPLICABLE LAW. This EULA is governed by the laws of
TEXAS, without regard to conflicts of laws principles. This EULA
shall not be governed by the UN Convention on Contracts for
the International Sale of Goods, the application of which is
expressly excluded. If a dispute, controversy or difference is not
amicably settled, it shall be finally resolved by arbitration in
Seoul, Korea in accordance with the Arbitration Rules of the
Korean Commercial Arbitration Board. The award of arbitration
shall be final and binding upon the parties.

Warranty

SPH-D700.book Page 235 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

14. ENTIRE AGREEMENT; SEVERABILITY. This EULA is the
entire agreement between you and Samsung relating to the
Software and supersedes all prior or contemporaneous oral or
written communications, proposals and representations with
respect to the Software or any other subject matter covered by
this EULA. If any provision of this EULA is held to be void,
invalid, unenforceable or illegal, the other provisions shall
continue in full force and effect.

4B. Manufacturer’s Warranty

235

SPH-D700.book Page 236 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Precautions for Transfer and Disposal

Phone: 1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)

If data stored on this device is deleted or reformatted using the
standard methods, the data only appears to be removed on a
superficial level, and it may be possible for someone to retrieve
and reuse the data by means of special software.

Phone: 1-888-987-HELP (4357)

To avoid unintended information leaks and other problems of
this sort, it is recommended that the device be returned to
Samsung’s Customer Care Center for an Extended File System
(EFS) Clear which will eliminate all user memory and return all
settings to default settings. Please contact the Samsung
Customer Care Center for details.

Important: Please provide warranty information (proof of
purchase) to Samsung’s Customer Care Center
in order to provide this service at no charge. If the
warranty has expired on the device, charges may
apply.
Customer Care Center:
1000 Klein Rd.
Plano, TX 75074
Toll Free Tel: 1.888.987.HELP (4357)
Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC:
1301 East Lookout Drive
Richardson, Texas 75082

236

4B. Manufacturer’s Warranty

Important: If you are using a handset other than a standard
numeric dialpad, dial the numbers listed in
brackets.
©

2010 Samsung Telecommunications America. All rights
reserved.
No reproduction in whole or in part allowed without prior
written approval. Specifications and availability subject to
change without notice.

Index
Symbols
106
Numerics
3-Way Call 60, 163
4G
Overview 179
Turning Off 181
Turning On 180
Understanding the Icons 180
4G Hotspot 181
A
Activation 5
Adapter
microSD Card 125
Add 2 Sec Pause 57
Add Account 74
Add to Home screen 34
Add Wait 57

Airplane Mode 78
Activating 78
Deactivating 78
Alarm
Customizing the Onscreen
Clock 114
Delete an Existing Alarm 114
Disable an Existing Alarm
114
Hiding the Onscreen Clock
115
Alarm Clock 113
Creating a New Alarm 113
AllShare 135
Configure Settings 209
Receiving Media from Server
210
Transmitting Media 210
Amazon
Purchasing and
Downloading Music 206

Amount to Synchronize 75, 194
Android Market 196
Accessing 196
Downloads 116
Installing a Google
Application 196
Launching a Google
Application 196
My Downloads 196, 197
Reinstalling a Google
Application 197
Selecting a Google
Application 196
Android OS
Update 118
Animation 69
Answering Calls 57
Applications 30, 197
Applications Screens
Using 30
Assigning Pictures 137

Index

Index

SPH-D700.book Page 237 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

237

SPH-D700.book Page 238 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Audible Touch Notifications 67
Audible selection 67
Audible touch tones 67
Haptic feedback 67
SD card notifications 67
Auto-Rotate Feature 37
Auto-sync 195
Enabling 73
B
Back Key 24
Back Up All Data 115
Backing Up Text Messages
116
Backlight 69
Keyboard 70
Battery 19–22
Capacity 19
Charging 20
Disposal 225
Extending Battery Life 21
Installing 19

238

Index

Battery Use 22
Viewing 70
Bluetooth 142–147
Accessing the Paired
Device’s Settings 146
Changing Your Bluetooth
Name 144
Deleting Paired Devices 145
Disconnecting Paired
Devices 145
Making Your Device Visible
144
Pairing 144
Scanning for Bluetooth
Devices 144
Sending Items 146
Settings 143
Visible 144
Brightness 70
Browser
Adding Bookmarks to Home
Screen 177

Clear cache 174
Clear history 174
Clear Location Access 175
Clear Passwords 175
Cookies 174
Creating Bookmarks 176
Creating Bookmarks from
other Tabs 176
Creating Website Settings
175
Default zoom 173
Enable Javascript 174
Enable Plug-ins 174
Home Page 175
Landscape-Only Display 174
Navigation 173
Page Settings 173
Pop-up Windows 174
Privacy Settings 174
Remember Passwords 175
Resetting to Default 175
Security Settings 175

Select Text 172
Selecting Onscreen Text 173
Text Size 173
Browser Menu 171–177
C
Calculator 115
Advanced panel 115
Calendar 106–112
Adding Corporate Events
106
Adding Events 108
Event Reminders 110
Call
Add call 60
Conference 60
Merge 60
Three-way call 60
Call Forwarding 164
Call Guard 166
Call Log 87–91
Accessing From Notifications
88

Altering a Number 91
Erasing 91
Making a Call 90
Options 88
Saving a Number 90
Call Waiting 162
Caller ID 162
Spoken 122
CallerID
Tect-to-Speech 122
Calling in Lock Mode 82
Camcorder
Audio recording 140
Bluetooth 141
Delete 141
Messaging 141
Recording mode 139
Resolution 139
Settings 138, 139
Share 141
Timer 139
Video Quality 140

Video Viewer 139
YouTube 141
Camcroder
Email 141
Gmail 141
Camera 131–141
see also Pictures
Face Detection 133
Focus Area 133
Front Facing 201
Gallery 135
Image Quality 134
Image Settings 135
Resolution 134
Scene Mode 133
Settings 132, 133
Share 136
Taking Pictures 131
Timer 134
Cannot install this Hardware
127
Clear Data 85
Index

Index

SPH-D700.book Page 239 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

239

SPH-D700.book Page 240 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Clear Default 85
Clear Location Access 175
Connection
Troubleshooting 127
Contact Icon 137
Contacts 92–105
Adding a Number 100
Adding an Entry 92
Adding Entries to Your
Favorites 102
Adding Your Facebook
Friends 103
Assigning a Picture 101
Assigning a Picture from
Device 101
Assigning a Picture from
online Gmail 102
Contact Menu Options 97
Deleting Entries 102
Dialing From 64
Editing 99
Editing a Number 100
240

Index

Entry Options 98
Linking 104
Saving a Phone Number 94
Sending via Bluetooth 101,
146
Sending via Email 101
Sending via Gmail 101
Unlinking 105
Context Menus 39
Corporate Email 190
Account Management
Settings 75
Account Settings 193
Account Syncronization 74
ActiveSync Settings 193
Add Account 74
Adding a Sync Account 74
Back up 116
Celendar Event
Synchronization 106
Configuration 193
Configuring Settings 193

Create and Send 192
Creating a Signature 195
Creation 190
Deleting 193
Email Signature 76
Opening 191
Replying 192
Signature 195
D
Data Roam Guard 167
Data Services 168–201
see also Web
Launching the Web 169
Password 6
User Name 168
Data Synchronization
Configuring 195
Date & Time 71
Automatic 71
Device (illus.) 11
Device Lock 80

Device Settings 66–86
Airplane Mode 78
Display Settings 69–72
Location Settings 72
Messaging Settings 156–
162
Sound Settings 66–69
TTY Use 78
Device Updates 115, 118
Dialing Options 57
Disconnecting a Bluetooth
Device 145
Display Screen 15, 70
DiVX 112
DivX
DivX Player 204
DRM-Free 204
Protected Content 204
Registration 203
VOD Registration Number
203
Downloads 196, 197

E
Edit Sync Groups
Assigning a Picture to Device
102
Edit text menu 100
Email 182
Account Settings 189
Create and Send 188
Creation 187
Forward with files 190
Icons/Shortcuts 183
Notifications 183
Opening 188
Refresh 188
Signature 190
Email Check Frequency 75,
194
Emergency call 82
Emergency Numbers 59
Emoticons 14, 52
End-of-Call Options 61
Enhanced 911 (E911) 59

Entering Text 41–55
123ABC Mode 49
ABC Mode 44
Additional QWERTY Text
Options 51
Android Keyboard 41
Emoticons 55
Numbers 45, 49, 54
QWERTY Keyboard 51
Selecting Mode 42
Selecting Mode in Swype 48
Smileys 54, 55
Symbols 45, 49, 54
Erasing Device Content 85
Event Reminders 110
Events
Erasing a Day’s 111
Erasing All Events 112
Exchange Account 190
Exchange Mail
Back up 116
Extending Battry Life 21
Index

Index

SPH-D700.book Page 241 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

241

SPH-D700.book Page 242 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

F
Facebook 135, 136
Adding Your Friends to your
Contacts 103
Get Friends 103
Logging In 103
Phonebook 36
Sync Friends 103
Factory data reset 86
Favorites 64, 102
FCC Notice 227
File Viewer
Accessing 112
Flight Mode 78
Folders
Creating and Managing 36
Forgot My Unlock Pattern 82
Front Facing Camera 201
G
Gallery 71, 135

242

Index

Gmail 95
Accessing Email Messages
185
Account Settings 186
Assigning a Contacts Image
102
Back up 115
Create and Send 184
Creation 183
Deleting 186
Opening 184
Refresh 184
Replying 186
Signature 185, 187
Viewing a New Email 185
Google
Account Management
Settings 74
Account Signin 55
Account Syncronization 73
Add Account 73
Adding a Sync Account 73

Creating an Account 55
Synchronizing an Account
73
Google Applications
Back up 116
Google Contact
Updating Images 102
Google Maps 211
Enabling the GPS 212
Launching 212
Searching 212
Google Search 25, 28
Google Talk 32
GPS Satellites
Usage 72
GPS Services 211
Group
Creating a New Group 96
H
Haptic Feedback 68
History 87
Home Key 24

Home Screen
Adding Web Bookmarks
177
Customizing 33
Extended Screens 28
Overview 26
Homepage
Creating 176

K
Key Functions 11
Keyboard Backlight 70
Keyboard Timeout 70
L
Language
Settings 72
Live Wallpapers 71
Location Mode
Activating 211
Location Settings 72
Lock Mode
Calling 82
Locking Your Device 80
Locking Your Device Screen
80

I
Image Viewer 133
In-Call Options 60
Input Method
Changing 42
International Dialing 77
International Dialing Code
Changing 77
Internet
see Web
Internet Email
Adding Additional Accounts
189

M
Making Calls 56
Market
Downloads 196, 197
Media volume 67

Memory
Clearing Application Cache
85
External SD card 83
Internal phone storage 83
Management 83
Uninstalling Third-Party
Applications 86
Menu i
Navigation 26
Menu Key 23
Add 23
Notifications 23
Search 23
Settings 23
Wallpaper 23
Menu Navigation 38
Using Your Fingers 38
Using your Keyboard 38
Message
Settings 161

Index

Index

SPH-D700.book Page 243 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

243

SPH-D700.book Page 244 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Message Threads
Deleting 161
Messaging
Email 182
Multimedia Messaging 158
Notification 156
Text Messaging 156
Visual Voicemail 150
microSD 123, 124
Available space 83
Before You Begin 126
Formatting 84
Total space 83
Troubleshooting Connection
127
Umnount 84
microSD Card 123–130
Adapter 125
Formatting 129
My Files 112
Re-insertion 124
Removal 123
244

Index

Write Protection 125
Missed Calls 58
MMS
Attaching Audio 159
Attaching Pictures 158
Attaching Slideshow 159
Attaching Videos 158
Capture Video 159
Record Audio 159
MMS Text Messaging 158
Multimedia Messaging 158
Composing 158
Opening 160
Replying to 160
Settings 161
Music 205–??, 206–207
Assigning a New Ringtone
207
Creating a Playlist 207
Player 206
Playlist 207

Purchasing and
Downloading from
Amazon 206
Streaming Music 208
Using a Song as a Ringtone
207
My Driver 198
My Files 112
N
NASCAR
Community 199
Exit 199
Fantasy 199
FanZone 199
Leaderboard 198
Miss Sprint 199
News & Alerts 199
Point Standings 198
Race Recap 198
Settings and Help 199
SPEED 198
Stats/Sched 198

SPH-D700.book Page 245 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

O
Orientation 37, 69
Outlook
Account Management
Settings 75
Synchronizing 74
Outlook Email 190
Owner’s Record 227
P
Pairing Bluetooth Devices 144
Phone Book
see Contacts
Phone Number
Displaying 41
Finding 63
Saving 62, 94

Q
Qik 13, 197
Enabling Front Facing
Camera 201
Recording Video 201
Quick Search 24
Using Text 25

R
Recently-Used Applications
Accessing 36
Resetting Your Device 86
Ringer volume 67
Ringers
Setting Audible Touch Tones
67
Setting for Messages 67
Setting for Notifications 67
Setting for Voice Calls 66
Silence All 68
Types 66
Vibrate 68
Roaming 164–167
Call Guard 166
Data Roam Guard 167
Roam Mode 165
Running Services
Managing 84
Stop Service 84

Index

Index

Phone vibrate 68
Picasa 136
Picture ID 137
Pictures
Sending via Bluetooth 146
Taking Pictures 131
Plugins 174
Plus Code Dialing 65, 77
Primary Shortcuts 29
PRL Updates
Downloading 118
Profile Updates
Downloading 118

Videos 199
NASCAR Sprint Cup Mobile
197
Navigating the Menus 26
Navigating the Web 170
North American Dialing 77

245

SPH-D700.book Page 246 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

S
Safety Information 222–228
Saving a Phone Number 62, 94
Screen Lock 80
Screen Orientation 69
Screen Timeout 69
Search Key 24
Searching
Using Text 25
Using Voice 25
Security 80–83
Menu 80
Select Input Method vi, 42
Select Locale 72
Set Wallpaper 71
Setting the Language
English 72
Español 72
Settings 66–86
Share
AllShare 136, 141
Bluetooth 136
246

Index

Email 136
Facebook 136
Gmail 136
Messaging (MMS) 136
Shortcuts
Adding via Home screen 34
Creating 33
Deleting 34
Via Applications Tab 33
Signature 76, 187, 190, 195
Silence All 68
Silent mode 69
Smiley 14
Smileys 52
SMS Text Messaging 156
Software Updates
Downloading 115
Firmware 115
Speed Dial
Assigning 64
Calling 65
Setting 57

Speed Dialing 64
Favorites 64
Sprint Football Live 197
Draft 200
Exit 200
Favorite Team 200
Help/About 200
News 200
Team Pages 200
Tweets 200
Sprint Mobile Hotspot 181, 197
Passkey 181
Sprint Navigation 213
Configuring Preferences 218
Creating a My Favorites
Location 217
Drive To 214
Getting Driving Directions
214
Launching the Product Tour
219
Maps & Traffic 214

Overview 213
Registering 213
Search 214
Search for Nearest Gas
Station 217
Share & More 214
Sharing a Recent Location
217
Turn by Turn Directions 216
Using 214
Using a Local Business
Category 216
Using a Physical Address
215
Sprint Service
Account Passwords 6
Activation 5
Operator Services 8
Sprint 411 7
Sprint TV 205
Sprint Zone 197
Status bar 26

Stop 84
Stop Service 84
Streaming Music 208
Suggested Word Choices 43
Swype
Configuring 46
Enabling 46
Entering Numbers 50
Entering Symbols 50
Help 47
Selecting a Text Input Mode
48
Settings 46
Text Entry Tips 47
Tips 50
Tutorial 47, 50
Synchronizing Accounts 73
System Select 166
System Update 117
System volume 67
T
Taking Pictures 131

Talk 32
Task Manager 84
Active Applications 84
Package 85
Text
Selecting on Web Page 173
Text Entry
see Entering Text 51
Text Message
Back up 116
Text Messaging 156
Settings 161
Text-to-Speech 121
Language 122
Settings 121
Third-Party Applications
Uninstalling 86
Three-Way Calling 163
TRS 79
TTY Use 78
Turning Your Device On and
Off 18
Index

Index

SPH-D700.book Page 247 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

247

SPH-D700.book Page 248 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Use GPS satellites 212
Use Wireless Networks
Activating 211
User Name 168
Updating 169

TV 205
U
Unlock Pattern 80
Changing the Pattern 82
Configuring Settings 81
Creating 80
Forgotten Your Pattern 82
Require pattern 81
Use visible pattern 81
Unlocking Your Device Screen
80
Unpairing a Bluetooth Device
145
Update Android 117
Update Firmware 115
Updating Firmware
OTA 117
Updating Your Device
Firmware 115
Updating Your PRL 118
Updating Your Profile 118
Use GPS Satellites 211
248

Index

V
Verbal Readout 122
Vibrate 68
Haptic Feedback 68
Vibration Intensity 68
Video
Encoding Settings 112, 202
Videos
Recording 137
Settings 140
Visible Passwords 82
Disable 83
Visual Voicemail
Changing your Main
Greeting 154
Editing the From Name 154

Enabling the Speakerphone
153
Listening to Multiple
Messages 152
Options 152
Setting Up 150
Settings 153
Voice Dialer 119
Activation 119
Calling a Contact 120
Calling a Number 120
Voice Dialing 120
Voice Input 43
Voice Search 12, 24, 25
Additional Functions 26
Voicemail
Notification 154
Retrieving 155
Setting Up 5
Volume
Media 67
Ringer 67

SPH-D700.book Page 249 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM

Turning Off 178
Turning On 177
Wi-Fi Hotspot 181
Window Animation 69
Wireless Networks 72
Location 72
Write Protection 125

W

Y

Index

Wallpaper 70, 137
Gallery 71
Home screen 137
Wallpaper Gallery 71
Warranty 229
Web 168–177
see also Data Services
Browser Menu 171–177
Email 182
Going to a Web page 171
Launching 169
Navigating 170
User Name 168
Zooming In and Out 171
Web Bookmarks 176
Wi-Fi
Connecting to a Network
178
Manually Scanning 178
Settings 178, 179
Status Indicators 179

YouTube 208
Z
Zooming 132, 138

Index

249

SPH-D700.book Page 250 Tuesday, August 17, 2010 11:14 AM



Source Exif Data:
File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.7
Linearized                      : No
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c043 52.372728, 2009/01/18-15:08:04
Format                          : application/pdf
Creator                         : psalvado
Description                     : Epic 4G
Title                           : Sprint SPH-D700 Epic 4G User Guide
Create Date                     : 2010:08:17 11:13:48Z
Creator Tool                    : FrameMaker 9.0
Modify Date                     : 2010:08:17 11:40:12-05:00
Metadata Date                   : 2010:08:17 11:40:12-05:00
Enhanced                        : By PDF Enhancer 3.1/Win
Spdf                            : 1112
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 9.3.3 (Windows)
Document ID                     : uuid:77d03709-8b4e-456e-8d38-08d124c3f9cb
Instance ID                     : uuid:6611bcb5-899d-440e-b132-467ef0cd29c5
Page Layout                     : SinglePage
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Count                      : 264
Author                          : psalvado
SPDF                            : 1112
Subject                         : Epic 4G
EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Navigation menu